Home

2008 Hummer H2 Owners Manual

1. cee 5 110 Add On Electrical Equipment 0 00 5 110 Windshield Wiper Fuses icce 5 110 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 110 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ceeeeeeee ees 5 110 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ccce 5 111 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 112 Underhood Fuse Block eceeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 113 Capacities and Specifications 5 117 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco E Parts GM Goodwrench EM Accessories Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle s performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by warranty GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on your vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will p
2. eee 2 50 Rear Vision Camera scccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 50 OnStar System oo cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 53 Universal Home Remote System 5 2 57 Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED eee 2 57 Storage Areas 0 0 0 0 cece r rreren 2 64 GIOVE BOX ose cic en asiaa Ta e OEE 2 64 Cupholder S ceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeee een eeeeeneeees 2 64 Center Console Storage eceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 64 Luggage Carrier 2s ccccciccieta sie tendarenreclavies 2 65 Rear Seat Armrest c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 65 Cargo Tie Downs SUT eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 2 65 All Weather Cargo Area SUT ceeeeeee ees 2 66 SUMEOOR oireet aaka Ea ae aE aa 2 67 Keys A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children The key can be used for the ignition and all door locks The key has a bar coded key tag that the dealer retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys Store this information in a safe place not in your vehicle
3. 08 3 29 Rear Axle ii cd chs cioedanaded tinct ashe 5 45 LOCKING zieren aange a 4 6 Rear Door Security Locks cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Rear Heated Seats cceceeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeneeeees 1 8 Rear Seat Armrest 0 cceceececeeceeeeeeeeeaeees 2 65 Rear Seat Audio RSA o 3 114 Rear Seat Entertainment System 00 3 105 Rear Vision Camera cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 2 50 Rear Windshield Washer Wiper 0 0ee 3 11 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with Compass and Temperature Display 2 45 Reclining Seatbacks Power ccseeeeeeeeees 1 5 10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Recovery Loops eian aA 4 40 Recreational Vehicle Towing cecce 4 51 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 0 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation 2 5 Remote Vehicle Start cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 2 8 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire wiscccsecess ceviecee eter eaateeete stewie 5 88 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 80 5 84 Replacement Bulbs ccceceeeeeeeeee eee ee eee eees 5 53 Replacement Parts Maintenance 065 6 14 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government 0sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 14 General Motors ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeee eee eeneeeeenes 7 14 United States Government eceeeeee eee 7 14
4. 7 16 Vehicle Identification Number VIN is cierestcnsicedacseeiicheadisi actescts 5 109 Service Parts Identification Label 5 109 Vehicle Remote Start ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 Ventilation Adjustment eeeeeeeeeee sents eee eees 3 29 M ISOS seca atest naan E E E 2 23 Voltmeter Gage s ccccdistissiiie cated lactesion eaa 3 37 13 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 31 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 56 Hazard Warning Flashers s eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 6 Other Warning Devices eeeeeeeeeeee teen ees 3 6 Safety and Symbols oirassa nansa iii Vehicle Damage vcisteicsencscoscancnesmeciancagatateadersthas iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance eee 5 74 Different Size 0 cece eect ee ee cnet eee eea een eea es 5 72 Replacement wiccocieviuerecscsceetenteeeetaentencsicaneter 5 74 Where to Put the Restraint eee eee 1 46 WIMGQOWS 4s cte8 cand aneri a e heetuact E A 2 19 ROWER eaman ited obeiaret A 2 20 14 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Cleaning 5 105 Washer eian a e NE TENRA 3 10 Washer FIUIC lt isgcssccecnnatds iisen mauno 5 35 Wiper Blade Replacement ee 5 54 Wiper FUSOS 2 22s icasdhoi arse Stee eieechadaee 5 110 WIGS aeree a E EE 3 9 Windshield Rear Washer Wiper ccecce 3 11 Winter DIVING sscreiceisstinedeas atesin naa 4 3
5. Off roading means you have left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes are not marked Curves are not banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you have gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that is why it is very important that you read this guide You will find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields are properly attached Remove any removable side steps See Assist Steps on page 4 32 Make sure any equipment you may need first aid kit cell phone flashlight etc is securely stored in the vehicle Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving If you do not know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving A CAUTION e Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown fo
6. 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Make sure the release button is positioned so you the retractor to set the lock would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary 1 62 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure If you had turned the airbag off with the switch remember to be sure to use the airbag off switch to turn on the right front passenger s airbag when you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk group See Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 A CAUTION If the right front passenger s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag Ina crash the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Do not turn off the passenger s airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group identified by the national government S
7. Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically To signal a lane change raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash This will cause the turn signals to automatically flash three times It will flash six times if the tow haul mode is active Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until you release the lever The lever will return by itself when it is released An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash more quickly than normal a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal 3 8 If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and a blown fuse See nstrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5 111 and Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 113 Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the DIC See DIC Warnings a
8. You will not be tightening the nuts fully yet 14 Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Then lower the jack completely 5 92 15 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench with the wheel wrench extender A CAUTION Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to a crash If you Clockwise have to replace them be sure to get new original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification See Capacities 16 When you install the wheel and tire you must also and Specifications on page 5 117 for wheel nut reinstall the center cap Place the cap on the wheel torque specification and tap it into place until it sits flush with the wheel Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 117 for the wheel nut torque specification 5 93 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools SUT Storing the Flat or Spare Tire Use the following art and text to help you store the spare or flat tire back into its proper location when you are done To store the flat or spare tire on the tire carrier
9. eceeeeeeeeee eee ees 6 4 USINO renean neatanas E EE EET 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 5 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Light ceeeeeeeeee eee 3 42 Manual USING eceeeeeee cece R iii Memory Seat and Mirrors a e 1 4 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 56 Midgate S Seea A e E A 2 14 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass and Temperature Display cccccccccccccececenen 2 45 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 49 Outside Convex Mirror ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 49 Outside Heated Mirrors ceeeeeeeeenee tenes 2 49 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 04 2 48 MRa sre cardacs seaicasar ata a EE ET 3 94 3 98 MYGMEINK COM scrdvoittduccelesscumisitenndeghondeanesabe neces 7 4 Navigation System Privacy seeeseeeeeeeeeeee 7 17 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual eeeeeeeeee ees 3 104 New Vehicle Break In e eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 28 Odometer irriaren a E Ee E EEES 3 33 Odometer Trip cccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 33 Off Road Driving ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 13 Off Road ReCOVETY cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 4 11 Oil ENQING ciiscinriicae rnes ain aE aS 5 13 Pressure Gage eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee E 3 45 Pressure Light lt ccivec seeedcnaesiitandad vate ressvetesnpes 3 46 Oil Engine
10. 1 Move the shift lever to the MANUAL MODE M This will force a downshift from the current gear for gears 3 through 6 2 Press the plus or minus button on the left side of the steering wheel to select the desired range of gears for your current driving conditions When in the MANUAL MODE M a number will display next to the M indicating the maximum available gear The DIC display will show the message MANUAL SHIFT on the first line and the maximum available gear will be displayed on the second line See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 49 and DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons on page 3 49 or DIC Operation and Displays Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem on page 3 54 for more information The number displayed in the DIC is the highest gear available The transmission will be limited to the gear selected and lower gears Shifting will occur normally while driving however the cluster will continue to display the maximum available gear Higher gears will not be available unless the selection is changed to include higher gears using the plus button Grade Braking is not available when the Driver Shift Control is active See Tow Haul Mode on page 2 36 and Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 for more information While using the DSC cruise control and the tow haul mode can be used 2 35 Tow Haul Mode Your vehicle is equipped with a tow haul mode The button is located on the instrument panel
11. A Light Truck LT Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the light truck LT Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description The service description indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire The load index can range from 1 to 279 Speed ratings range from A to Z 5 57 Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional access
12. A CAUTION Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in appropriate infant restraints Child Restraint Systems A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant A CAUTION The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal The harness system holds the infant in place and ina injuries Young children should always be crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint secured in appropriate child restraints A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness 1 43 Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle A CAUTION A
13. Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This can prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction 3 42 Notice If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well your vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by your warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 This light comes on as a check to show it is working when the ignition is turned ON RUN but the engine is not running If the light does not come on have it repaired This light also comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on your veh
14. Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both provide easier cold starting and better protection for the engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you need for good performance and engine protection Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible
15. Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 5 59 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 69 5 60 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 72 Vehicle Capacity Wei
16. RN KER 02020502026 S D 8 D 5 5 Q The HUMMER H2 has an approximate approach angle A of 42 and a departure angle B of 37 4 16 Design specifications required a minimum gradeability of 60 31 slope with the vehicle fully loaded on high friction surfaces at 6 mph 9 7 km h The vehicle is expected to traverse this grade only for short durations Never stop and idle the vehicle or park it on this grade VAN Ly W Also your vehicle should be able to traverse a 40 Your vehicle can climb a 16 inch 40 6 cm vertical step 22 side slope at 6 mph 9 7 km h while fully loaded Step climbing is best done by approaching the step at on high friction surfaces an angle rather than straight on Brake and Accelerator Operation Techniques for Off Road Driving For logs walls rocks severe ditches hills sand etc 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Do not rev the engine Select the proper transmission and transfer case gear range usually FIRST 1 gear 4LO LOCK for such obstacles If wheel spin is experienced maintain steady throttle with your foot off the brake pedal to allow the Traction Control System TCS to control the wheel spin TCS might not operate if the brakes are applied If wheel spin cannot be controlled by the TCS system fully press the brake pedal with your left foot so all wheel spin is stopped Back away from the obstacle so that a
17. Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You will need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer Because you are a good deal longer you will need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you 4 63 Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you are turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the b
18. The screen display mode normal full and zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu To change any feature do the following 1 Press the LJ display menu button on the remote control 2 Use the remote control A v lt j gt navigation arrows and the enter button to use the setup menu 3 Press the LJ button again to remove the setup menu from the screen 3 108 Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heard through the following possible sources e Wireless Headphones e Vehicle Speakers e Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if your vehicle has this feature The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system if your vehicle has this feature The DVD player can be selected as an audio source on the RSA system See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 114 for more information When a device is connected to the A V jacks or the radio s auxiliary input jack if your vehicle has this feature the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle sp
19. To open the hood do the following 1 Release both hood side latches Before closing the hood be sure all filler caps are on properly To close the hood do the following 1 Hold up the hood a few inches from the closed position and then let it go so that it has enough force to engage the hood latch 2 Pull up on the assist handles to be sure that the hood is latched 3 Latch both hood side latches 3 Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull the assist handles toward you to lift the hood 4 Pull the hood open until it is supported by the cables Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 6 2L V8 engine here is what you will see TA Coolant Surge Tank See Cooling System on page 5 29 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 26 Engine Air Cleaner Filter and Air Filter Restriction Indicator If Equipped See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 35 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 13 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 13 Air Filter Restriction Indicator If Equipped See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 21 Engine Cooling Fa
20. You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating CWR CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It doesn t include the weight of the people inside but you can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each seat The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicles CWR Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached so that you won t go over the GVWR or GAWR If you are using a weight distributing hitch weigh the vehicle without the spring bars in place You ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 4 67 4 NOTES 4 68 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE sianie a paean EE 5 3 Accessories and Modifications ccecceee 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 0008 5 3 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 Doing Your Own Service Work 00 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle cciccorvcecdetvestancatenustccneneeaestebezane 5 4 UCU raea asec eee cnateceaeatens ee goat anes 5 5 Gasoline Octane w siesssurienoi terini miinan 5 5 Gasoline Specifications semissonans 5 5 California Fuel cccceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeaeeneees 5 5 AGGIIVES Sertons eese E EEE 5 6 Fuels in Foreign Countries csceeeeeeneeeeenes 5 6 Filling the TANK wcsccccesccuctec
21. cable from the vehicle with the good battery Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Return the positive remote terminal cover if equipped to its original position Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production They are not filled to reach a certain level When checking the fluid level on any axle variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume Also if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area Therefore a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two Remember that the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface When the differential is cold the proper level is from 5 8 inch to 1 5 8 inch 15 mm to 40 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to rea
22. 2 47 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors If your vehicle has outside power foldaway mirrors the controls are located on the driver s door armrest e Press A to select the driver side mirror Then press the arrows located on the four way control pad to adjust the mirror Press A again to deselect this mirror e Press B to select the passenger side mirror Then press the arrows located on the four way control pad to adjust the mirror Press B again to deselect this mirror e Press C to fold the mirrors out to the driving position e Press D to fold the mirrors in to the folded position 2 48 If the mirrors are accidentally folded unfolded manually they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded position If this happens you will need to reset the mirrors See Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors next Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the following occurs e The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding e They are accidentally manually folded unfolded e The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position e The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving speeds To reset the power foldaway mirrors fold and unfold them three times using the mirror controls This will reset them to their normal position Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If the vehicle has this feature the driver s outs
23. 2 59 Programming Universal Home Remote Fixed Code If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to www learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before you begin If you do not follow these actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure 2 60 To program up to three devices 1 To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door opener remove the battery cover on your hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener motor If you see a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above you have a Fixed Code garage door opener If you do not see a row of dip switches return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code Your hand held transmitter may have between eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of transmitter Your garage door opener receiver motor head unit may also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Home Remote If the total number of switches on the motor o 3 4 5 6 7 8 head and hand held transmitter are different or if N Ea E the dip switch settings are different use the T ED Ea dip switch settings on the motor head unit to Ea Ea Ea Ea program your Universal Home Rem
24. Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice f the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake Notice If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets Turn off the r
25. This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer See Engine Oil on page 5 13 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC REAR ACCESS OPEN On the SUV this message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate is open while the ignition is in ON RUN Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display On the SUT this message displays if the midgate is open or one or both of the midgate latches are not fully closed Turn off the vehicle and check that the midgate and the latches are closed Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 and DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons earlier in this section for more information REPLACE BATTERY I
26. To turn the system off press and hold the button 3 29 peo of fm Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls Manual Operation Fan The fan buttons on the rear seat audio control panel let you manually adjust the fan speed Press to increase airflow and to decrease airflow 3 30 Increase Decrease Temperature These buttons select the temperature of the air flowing into the rear passenger area Press the button for warmer air and press the button for cooler air The temperature settings will display in 0 12 increments going from the coolest 0 to the warmest 12 setting A Mode Press the mode button to manually change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display Multiple presses cycles through the delivery selections 7s Vent This mode directs air through the headliner outlets 4 Bi Level This mode directs air through the floor outlets as well as the headliner outlets The rear system floor outlet is located at the passenger side rear quarter trim panel ted Floor This mode directs air through the floor outlets The rear system floor outlets are located under the seats Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages on your vehicle The pictures help to locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes
27. e You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire e You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric e The tire has a bump bulge or split e The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information 5 70 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system con
28. or StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver Your vehicle will still have brake traction control when traction control is off but will not be able to use the engine speed management system See Traction Control Operation next for more information When the traction control system has been turned off you may still hear system noises as a result of the brake traction control coming on It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 39 When the transfer case is in Four Wheel Low Lock the stability system is automatically disabled the StabiliTrak light will come on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on the DIC Both traction control and StabiliTrak are automatically disabled in this condition Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels engine speed management and by applying brakes to each individual wheel brake traction control as necessary The traction control system is enabled
29. 1 Close the tire carrier See Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier on page 2 16 for tire carrier operation 2 Place the flat or spare tire onto the tire carrier with the outside of the wheel facing you 3 Reinstall the three nuts holding spare or flat tire to the tire carrier Tighten the nuts by hand 5 94 4 Use the wheel wrench and the wheel wrench extension to tighten the nuts firmly Try to move the tire back and forth slightly to be sure it is secure Storing the Jack and Tools To store the jack and tools 1 Lower the jack completely 2 Place the jack in the mounting bracket 5 Slide the license plate holder onto the spare or flat tire Secure it from the back of the tire carrier with the wing nut If you choose not to reinstall the spare or flat tire on 3 Turn the hole at the top of the jack clockwise until the vehicle you will still need to reinstall the the jack is held tight in the mounting bracket license plate holder on the spare tire carrier 4 Push and pull on the jack and retighten if necessary to make sure the jack is secure 5 Place the wheel blocks in the tool bag 6 Place the remaining tools in the tool bag 7 Make sure nothing is located under or in front of the seat and then lift the rear driver s seat so that the floor is exposed See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 1 8 for more information 8 Place the narrow end of the tool bag under the seat rails as shown Slide the tool bag un
30. 110 kg force on a person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint 1 40 A CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide 1 41 Q What are the different types of add on child A restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 42
31. 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp housing Roof Marker Lamp Corner 3 Remove the bulb from the bulb socket For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your 4 Install the new bulb into the bulb socket dealer retailer 5 Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn it clockwise to lock it 5 53 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear RS and cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 TIN for more information Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways For proper type and length see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 2 Push the release lever B to disengage the hook and push the wiper arm A out of the blade C 3 Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release lever click into place To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the following 1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield 5 54 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details Z CAUTION Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous e Overloading your vehicle s tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident
32. 5 82 Removing the Spare Tire SUT The spare tire is attached to the tire carrier To remove the spare tire In order to remove the spare tire you may need someone to assist you 1 Open the tire carrier See Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier on page 2 16 for tire carrier operation 2 Unscrew the wing nut on the back of the tire carrier Nr TON ait in MAR L al K CEE NS Pull off the license plate holder from the spare tire Attach the wheel wrench to the wheel wrench extender to remove the wheel nuts Turn the wheel wrench with the wheel wrench extender counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Removing the Spare Tire and Tools SUV Removing the Tools SUV The equipment you need is located under the driver s side second row seat To remove the equipment 1 Locate the tools by lifting the driver s side second row seat up to expose the floor See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 1 8 for more information 2 Remove the strap from the seat rail Then carefully slide the tool bag out from under the seat rail as shown 6 Remove the three wheel nuts holding the spare tire onto the tire carrier 7 Pull off the spare tire and gently lower to the ground Set it next to the flat tire Take care not to pinch the seat cables or electrical harness 5 84 3 Open the tool bag The following tools needed to Before proceeding be sure to set the wheel blocks at remove the spare tire
33. Control System Check At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 2 40 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your dealer retailer for service A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 40 Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN but do not start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift le
34. Dome Lamps TETA A 3 19 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage N 3 40 Dome Lamp Override 0 3 19 Tire Presstite Light arri rossii anse inin 3 41 Entry Exit LIQ Mee E E E 3 19 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 0 00cccccseeeeees 3 42 Reading Lamps ities ages aaa aa 3 19 Qil Press re GAGS sisinisncatetneassaeasemomegscmasansts 3 45 Battery Run Down Protection spins mite mest igure 3 19 Oil Pressure Light s s ssisseissieseiteeeereeeee eeen 3 46 Accessory Power Outlet S 1 1 sce 3 20 Seer Uy Light aa covet escent e cerned 3 46 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 3 21 Cruise COO Light wesc scent soncindansriccentutoride 3 46 Analog Glocke nert ne cceatainas E bekcnceatesinten 3 21 3 1 Section 3 Instrument Panel Highbeam On Light a an 3 47 Using an MP3 Radio with Six Disc Player 3 94 Tow Haul Mode Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 3 47 Using an MP3 Radio with CD and Fuel Gages aienea iae a E stance needs 3 47 DVD Player picari mraint Soap ona 3 98 Low Fuel Warning Light a src 3 48 XM Radio Messages sascnseernrrrnncrnreresen 3 103 Driver Information Center DIC 3 49 Navigation Radio System ceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 104 DIC Operation and Jae Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System 3 105 Using DIC Buttons ia scactsctiiisecideseatic 3 49 Rear Seat Audio RSA 1 0 seers 3 114 DIC Operation and Displays Theft Deterrent Feature eceeeeee
35. See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 for more information If a MP3 WMA is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control XM Radio Messages XL Explicit Language Channels These channels or any others can be blocked at a customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 XM Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When you move into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune to another channel Channel Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info No artist information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 3 103 No Title Info No song title information is available at this time on thi
36. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued e Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your vehicle s tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire s tread is badly worn or if your vehicle s tires have been damaged replace them 5 55 Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustrations are examples of a typical LT Metric tire sidewall eC SPEC 2012 Ms ai6 E 129 Wey ava X xxx wna od S Z Z gt O go 7 aN RY Sn 7 A F 7y Con Maais C wor eqioo S kS amp Light Truck LT Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail 5 56 B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance crite
37. TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are e One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor e The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recomme
38. Theft Deterrent Systems ccceeeeeeee eres 2 24 Content Theft Deterrent ccceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 24 PASS Key I ccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 2 26 PASS Key Ill Operation ccccccccceeeee sees 2 26 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 28 New Vehicle Break In ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 28 IGNITION POSITIONS isnin aan 2 28 Retained Accessory Power RAP 000 2 29 Starting the Engine ccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 30 Engine Coolant Heater 0ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 Automatic Transmission Operation 6 2 32 ToOw Haul Mode sierden ieina 2 36 Full Time Four Wheel Drive asaan 2 36 Parking Brake sicicgeeiaiey ein a are ESERE 2 40 Shifting Into PARK P sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 41 Shifting Out of PARK P ssiri criera 2 42 Parking Over Things That Burn s a s 2 43 Engine Exhaust c cccccesciace csdeaetvnaetanstceciecapencs 2 43 Running the Engine While Parked 2 44 MIOT Sennaa a 2 45 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display 2 45 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 0 06 2 48 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 6 2 49 Outside Convex Mirror ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 49 Outside Heated Mirrors 00 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 49 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls Object Detection Systems
39. audio systems only DSP settings provide a choice of different listening experiences 3 79 The following DSP settings are available e Normal Select this setting to adjust the audio for normal mode This provides the best sound quality for all seating positions e Driver Select this setting to adjust the audio for the driver to receive the best possible sound quality e Rear Select this setting to adjust the audio for the rear seat passengers to receive the best possible sound quality Surround Centerpoint Select this setting to enable Bose Centerpoint Centerpoint signal processing produces a surround sound listening experience from a CD or XM stereo digital audio source Centerpoint delivers five independent audio channels from conventional two channel stereo recordings Not available for AM FM 3 80 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade press the dd knob until the speaker control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the Jd knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting You can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow gt gt FWD or REV button until the desired levels are obtained To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
40. ccceeeeeeeeeenee eres 5 107 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems c eeeeeeeeee teens 1 43 Infants and Young Children s 1 39 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 47 Older Children escenes ianea 1 36 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeeeee erences 1 57 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 1 60 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 46 Cigarette Lighter cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 21 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 106 Exterior Lamps Lenses seeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 104 Fabric Garpet esnean i enei E asana 5 101 Finish Care sennecese aa naa 5 104 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces ceecee ins 5 102 Interon eare a A E 5 100 Leathel cea cacccshenccneeneateecehcas pcont eewheecen teaches 5 102 Speaker Covers ccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeaeeeees 5 103 WANS eo scieoe sean a E saiescmes 5 106 Underbody Maintenance eeeeeee 5 107 Washing Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeee neers 5 103 WeatherStripS ceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 103 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 105 Wood Panels serisinin inanon 5 103 Climate Control System Dual Automatic cceceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeees 3 22 Outlet Adjustment ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 29 Rear Air Conditioning and
41. cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure Using the DIC tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional information 5 64 and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons on page 3 49 or DIC Operation and Displays Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem on page 3 54 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 Your vehicle s TPMS can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 67 and Tires on page 5 55 Notice Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered by your warranty Do not use liquid tire sealants
42. disappear from the display when it is off Audio can be heard through wired headphones not included plugged into the jacks on the RSA If your vehicle has this feature audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through the RSA attach the iPod or portable audio device to the front auxiliary input if available on the front audio system Turn the iPod on then choose the front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button ERIE Rear Seat Audio with Rear Climate Control shown Q Power Press the cy button to turn RSA on and off Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if your vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary K l Seek When listening to FM AM or XM if equipped press the left K1 or right gt seek arrow to go to the next or the previous station or channels and stay there This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio Press and hold either the left KI or right gt seek arrow until the display flashes to tune to an individual station The display stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than
43. engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty 5 6 Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbony MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We rec
44. if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them A CAUTION Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes They are not designed to inflate in rollover rear crashes or in many side crashes Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle and in the event of a vehicle rollover They are not designed to inflate in frontal or in rear crashes Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A CAUTION Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on o
45. s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the airbag off switch is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the airbag it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system The right front passenger s airbag could inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happens do not let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in the right front passenger s position for example do not secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat until you have your vehicle serviced See Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 and Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 34 for more on this including important safety information If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH o
46. the top tether according to your child restraint 1 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that instructions and the following instructions the top tether be attached attach the top tether to the top tether anchor if equipped Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 1 1 To access the top tether anchor raise the passenger side seat cushion by pulling up on the strap loop at the rear of the seat cushion and fold the seat cushion forward Then fold the seatback forward See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 1 8 for additional information 1 2 Place the child restraint in the center seating position 1 3 Find the top tether anchor at the rear base of the center seat If your child restraint has a single tether route the tether over the seatback If your child restraint has a dual tether route the tether over the seatback 1 54 1 5 Return the rear passenger side seatback to its 3 Tighten the top tether upright position You may have to move the child restraint to a temporary position to do this Ensure that the seatback locks and the A CAUTION safety belt is routed properly Then lower the seat cushion until the seatback and the seat i cushion lock into position If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could 2 Attach the lower attachments to the lower anchors cause injury to the person sitting there Always If the child rest
47. 64 Where Are the Airbags cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 66 When Should an Airbag Inflate ee 1 69 What Makes an Airbag Inflate e 1 70 How Does an Airbag Restrain ceee 1 70 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 70 Airbag Off Switch sssrinds einean 1 72 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 75 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle o ae 1 75 Restraint System Check eeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 76 Checking the Restraint Systems 0 0 1 76 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Gras Maceinos 1 77 1 1 On a vehicle with power seats the controls used to Front Seats operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats To adjust the seat do any of the following Power Seats e Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward e Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down e Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down e Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down On seats with power reclining seatbacks the control is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats See Power Reclining Seatbacks under Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 5 A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory
48. Available Occupant ES and Cargo Weight TOO Ibs 217 KO Available Cargo EJ E 250 Ibs 113 kg 4 47 Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Certification Tire Label Example 3 item Description Vehicle Capacity A Weight for a Example 3 g GAWR FRT Co RIM COLD TIRE PRESSUR Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs eae 91 kg x5 es Available Cargo 0 Ibs 0 kg A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver s door 4 48 The label shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Z CAUTION Do not load your
49. Brake System ABS improves your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop ona slippery road Even though you have ABS begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Antilock Brake System ABS on page 4 4 e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road e Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches can appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach such as around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow e Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you do not have blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourse
50. CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap A CAUTION Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture 5 31 A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine 1 Locate the coolant surge tank pressure cap that has this label 4 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark 2
51. Clock The analog clock is located on the instrument panel above the radio The clock is not connected with any other vehicle system and runs by itself To adjust the clock 1 2 Locate the adjustment button directly below the clock face Push and hold the adjustment button to advance the clock hands Holding the button down will cause the clock to advance faster Release the button before reaching the desired time Push and release the button to increase the time by one minute increments until the desired time is reached 3 21 Climate Controls Dual Automatic Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle can be controlled with this system Your vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section Different climate control settings can be selected for the driver and passengers 3 22 Driver s Side Temperature Control The driver s side temperature buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the drivers side The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The driver side temperature display will show the temperature setting dec
52. Control System TCS on page 4 5 What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down 4 10 Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while the front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 4 3 It is better to remove
53. E Briefly press this button to turn the display on or off Your vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera See Rear Vision Camera on page 2 50 2 45 Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation C Press this button to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off The indicator light to the left of the button will turn on to indicate when the feature is on Once the mirror is turned off it will remain off until it is turned back on or until the vehicle is restarted Temperature Display The temperature can be displayed by pressing the compass temperature button Pressing the compass temperature button once briefly will toggle the temperature reading on and off To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius press and hold the compass temperature button for approximately four seconds until the display blinks F and C Press and release the compass temperature button to toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings After approximately four seconds of inactivity the display will stop blinking and display the last selection made If an abnormal reading is displayed for an extended period of time please consult your dealer retailer Under certain circumstances a delay in updating the temperature is normal 2 46 Compass Operation Press the compass temperature button once briefly to turn the compass on or off Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if the following occurs e The
54. Heating System FIC CIOMIC winctsasncacecsenectnies aeaa 3 29 COCK E E E E 3 21 Clock Setting ccceceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 73 Collision Damage Repair eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 10 COMPASS sieten A E dcttes 2 45 Content Theft Deterrent 0c eceeeeeeeeeee eres 2 24 Control Of a Vehicle erriertan 4 3 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage cceeeeeeneee ees 3 40 Heater Engine cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 Surge Tank Pressure Cap cceeeeeeeeeee eres 5 26 Cooling System sinsir a eei 5 29 Cruise Control cccecceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 12 Cruise Control Light esseci iiine eisti sanes 3 46 CUPNOIJET S cpecraataneenadeae eaae Se Ea EARE 2 64 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation c cceeeeeneeeeeneee ees 7 9 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users 00e 7 4 Customer Assistance Offices 0eeeees 7 5 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 5 7 2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 6 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 7 14 Customer Assistance Information cont Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government cceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 0eeeee 7 14 Roadside Assistance Program eccere 7 6 Service Publications Ordering Information 7 15 Daytime Ru
55. J Heated Windshield Washer a J Case 5 116 Four Wheel Drive System J Case Stud 1 Trailer Connector Battery Power J Case Mid Bussed Electrical Center 1 J Case Climate Control Blower J Case Left Bussed Electrical Center 2 J Case Relays FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed FAN LO HDLP LO NIG CMPRSR STATA PWAITRN REAR DEFOG RUNIGRNK Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information Capacities and Specifications Application E e trie For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer retailer for more information Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a Cooling System SUV Model 16 7 qt 15 8 L SUT Model 15 4 qt 14 6 L Fuel Tank 32 0 gal 121 0 L Transmission Fluid Pan Removal and Filter Replacement eot oo iY BLY 5 117 Capacities and Specifications cont d Application O n O Transfer Case Fluid 1 5 qt Wheel Nut Torque 140 Ib ft 1After refill the Ilevel must be rechecked See Cooling System on page 5 29 After refill the level must be rechecked Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating range See Engine Oil on page 5 13 All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the appropriate level as recommended in this
56. Loading Your Vehicle cceeeeeeeeeeee ee eee eees 4 44 Locking Rear Axle c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 Lockout Protection ccceccee eee eaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Locks Delayed Locking irer ara sisina 2 11 DOOL mesan aE E e O EE 2 10 Lockout Protection ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Power DOOP essesassicsesioieereicssetslasieerdniviesds 2 11 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS 0 eeeeeeeeeee ees 2 12 Loss Of Control ccccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 4 12 Low Fuel Warning Light asasena 3 48 Luggage Carrien iecctverscciisusciaeiccetsindenesetioctencl 2 65 Lumbar Power Controls 0cccceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 1 3 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services eeeeeeee 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill e cacccnccciasceesanteessaneedaebiqasscacwed 6 9 At Least Once a Month c cccceceeeeeeaees 6 9 At Least Once a Year ccc cece cceeeeeeeaeeeeenes 6 10 INTOGUCTION sirere ri 6 2 Maintenance Footnotes cccececeseeeeeeeeneee 6 7 Maintenance Record cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeenes 6 16 Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Maintenance Requirements 0eeeeeeeeeee 6 2 Owner Checks and Services cc0ceceeeeeees 6 8 Maintenance Schedule cont Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance
57. OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions You may cancel your OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar 2 53 A complete OnStar Owner s Guide and the OnStar Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle s OnStar Subscriber glove box literature For more information visit onstar com or onstar ca contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar com OnStar Services For new vehicles with OnStar the Safe amp Sound Plan or the Directions amp Connections Plan is included for one year from the date of purchase You can extend this plan beyond the first year or upgrade to the Directions amp Connections Plan For more information press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor 2 54 Some OnStar services Such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until you register with OnStar Available Services with Safe amp Sound Plan e Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment e Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped e Link to Emergency Service
58. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM automatic volume label on the radio displays 4 Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med or High to select the level of radio volume compensation The display times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting increases the audio volume to compensate for faster vehicle speeds Noise Compensated Volume NCV Radio with CD and DVD Your vehicle has a Bose Audio System It includes Bose AudioPilot noise compensation technology When turned ON AudioPilot continuously adjusts the audio system equalization to compensate for background noise so that your music always sounds the same at the set volume level This feature is most effective at lower radio volume settings where background noise can affect how well you hear the music being played through the vehicle s audio system At higher volume settings where the music is much louder than the background noise there might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot To activate NCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM label on the radio display 4 Press the pushbutton under the ON label The display times out after approximately 10 seconds For additional information on AudioPilot please visit ww
59. Roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body 1 70 Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first second and third rows if equipped with a third row seat The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent all such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 69 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 70 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being a
60. Vehicle to Get it Out 4 40 WHE sii teenies ee a E 4 36 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 22 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 105 EDR ssseveeiwwcsdalvexeaodeeteoeeestiiedeoniviventadieesieved ieee 7 16 Electrical System Add On Equipment 0 eseeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 110 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 112 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 110 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 0 006 5 111 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 110 Underhood Fuse Block eeeeeeeeee eee 5 113 Windshield Wiper Fuses eeeeeeeeees 5 110 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System 4 54 Engine Air Cleaner Filter cccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 18 Check and Service Engine Soon Light 3 42 Coolant e E eens ive 5 24 Coolant Heater ccccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 Coolant Temperature Gage eeeeeeee eens 3 40 Drive Belt Routing 0 c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 15 Engine Compartment Overview s 5 12 EXM USE lt csctea daieedintsntven Mugiesdalieaiacisebaaciet 2 43 Fan NOISE esni ene one eee ER 5 33 O E 5 13 Oil Life System sirnana nean T 5 16 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5 28 Overheating icaetaiteatine vnc ea 5 27 Running While Parked eseeeeeeeeeee eens 2 44 Stating resnost sanaa E aS 2 30 ENntry Exit Ligh 2 csccnces chaiensecene
61. Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on your vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on your vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on your vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 108 Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product 5 103 Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior La
62. Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane e Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility e Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle e When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger 4 12 Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way
63. Your vehicle s remote negative terminal negative terminal of the good battery Use a is marked GND remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run Do not let the other end touch anything until the the engine for awhile next step The other end of the negative cable 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery does not go to the dead battery It goes to a If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote service negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 5 43 Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal 5 44 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery Disconnect the red positive
64. a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 1 47 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child lower attachments B restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor 1 48 Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top t
65. after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for HUMMER whenever it appears in this manual This manual describes features that may be available in this model but your vehicle may not have all of them For example more than one entertainment system may be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered without a front passenger or rear seats Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Litho in U S A Part No 15862631 A First Printing Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 www helminc com Propri taires Canadiens On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais aupr s de concessionnaire ou l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 www helminc com 2007 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Using this Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn about the vehicle s features and controls Pictures and words work together to explain things Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found Safety
66. and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver load capacity of your vehicle and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs See Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips 4 46 Example 1 Item Description Totali Vehicle Capacity Weight for joa kg Example 1 9 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 300 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 2 Example 2 Item Description Total Vehicle Capacity A Weight for Bako Example 2 g Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 750 Ibs 340 kg 68 kg x 5
67. and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use See also OnStar System on page 2 53 in this manual for more information Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the system may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and o
68. and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 Alternatively you may call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or you may write to the Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive O
69. as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing we suggest the following tips e Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait e
70. at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer later in this section Press the button on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel to enable the tow haul mode A light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that tow haul mode has been selected Press the button again to turn off Tow Haul mode The indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off The vehicle will automatically turn off Tow Haul mode every time it is started Driving with Tow Haul mode activated without a heavy load or with no trailer will cause reduced fuel economy and unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics but will not cause damage Grade Braking Transmission Grade Braking works in Tow Haul mode to automatically downshift the transmission when the driver is braking The purpose is to aid in braking or maintaining vehicle speeds on down grades by shifting to a lower gear to utilize engine braking 4 57 Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more informa
71. back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 5 62 Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
72. braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider e ls the path ahead clear e Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead e Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There is more discussion of these subjects later e Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you are not prepared When possible it is a good practice to survey the landscape ahead on foot prior to driving to observe hidden obstacles 4 20 When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles the wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what is not Drinking and dri
73. camera screen or use the screen during longer higher speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross traffic Your judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances So if you do not use proper care before backing up you could hit a vehicle child pedestrian bicyclist or pet resulting in vehicle damage injury or death Even though the vehicle has the RVC system always check carefully before backing up by checking behind and around your vehicle 2 51 Rear Vision Camera Location The image is provided by the camera located on the rear bumper The camera uses a special lens The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual Bottom of Spare Tire distance The area displayed by the camera is limited on screen The camera does not display objects which are close Saas to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper 7 The spare tire and carrier extends rearward of the rear E bumper The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions _ Corners of Bumper d The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides 2 52 Notice The spare tire extends farther away from rear of the vehicle than the trailer hitch shown on rear vision camera display Your spare tire could hit an object even though there appears to be enough distance on the display between
74. can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Winter Driving on page 4 36 2 44 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P A CAUTION Full time four wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll even if the shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear not in NEUTRAL Always set the parking brake Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move See Shifting Into PARK P on page 2 41 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have this mirror When on an automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror with the compass reading and the outside temperature
75. cap fully See Filling the Tank on page 5 7 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 67 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 62 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 for more information 3 62 TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays when you turn off the Traction Control System TCS or when the TCS has been automatically disabled Adjust your driving accordingly See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 5 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 7 for more information TCS may be automatically disabled due to overheating which could occur if the TCS activates continuously for an extended period of time TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice lf you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not dr
76. child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Make sure the child restraint is properly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual A booster seat C D is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 1 44 To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 47 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in
77. compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly In order to calibrate CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed push in the compass temperature button for approximately eight seconds or until CAL is displayed The compass can only be calibrated by driving the vehicle forward in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction Do not attempt to calibrate the compass by driving in reverse Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 2 Press and hold the compass temperature button for five seconds until a zone number appears in the display Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing
78. control There some things not to do when driving down a hill These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident e When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that is not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you do not drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Your vehicle is much more likely to stall when going uphill But if it happens when going downhill Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine will not start get out and get help 4 27 Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider A CAUTION Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead e Ahill that can be driven straight
79. do the following aye 1 Fold the auxiliary panel back into the exterior of the Midgate The panel should snap loudly back into position which means it is secure 2 Reverse the steps for lowering the Midgate listed previously The Midgate must be fully latched on both sides before the window can be raised 3 Press the top part of the Midgate window switch to express up the window To stop the window press the switch a second time 3 Press either one of the two power Midgate latch release buttons The Midgate will move slightly forward from its closed position The latch release buttons operate while the ignition is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY in RAP mode or up to ten minutes after removing the key If necessary press the global express down button to reactivate the release buttons for an additional ten minutes 4 Pull the Midgate inward and down to its fully lowered position 5 Flip the auxiliary panel on the top of the Midgate into position to bridge the gap created by the hinges in the Midgate There are two finger holds on the panel Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier Opening the Spare Tire Carrier To open the spare tire carrier do the following 2 Lift up on the latch on the left side of the vehicle to release the spare tire carrier from the vehicle The handle will stay in the raised position until the spare tire carrier is closed and latched properly 1 Press the button on the pin B which is attached to th
80. drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate e Make sure all other windows are shut e Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 2 43 To lock and unlock the liftgate use any of the power door lock switches or the remote keyless entry RKE transmitter To open the liftgate do the following 1 Move the spare tire carrier out of the way See Opening the Spare Tire Carrier under Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier on page 2 16 2 Pull the handle located in the center of the door To close the liftgate do the following 1 Pull the liftgate down until it latches 2 Move the spare tire carrier back into place See Closing the Spare Tire Carrier under Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier on page 2 16 Midgate SUT A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo area covered and the tailgate and the Midgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can not see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the cargo covers on and the tailgate and Midgate open or if electrical wiring or
81. end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0 F 18 C To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Locate the electrical cord near the front recovery loop on the driver s side of the vehicle 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer retailer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle The dealer retailer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 31 Automatic Transmission Operation Your vehicle has a Hydra Matic 6L80 automatic ZN CAUTION transmission and has an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster This display It is dangero
82. from the inside slide the manual lever at the top of the door up or down Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the front doors a Lock Remove the key from the ignition and press to lock all of the doors rt Unlock Press to unlock the doors Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch or the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate if equipped is open the delayed locking feature will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors You can also program this feature using the DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program your vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 for more information on DIC programming Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle may have rear door security locks These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door You must open the rear doors to access
83. gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you could damage the engine If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by your warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent
84. in the unit of measurement selected Tire Pressure The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer retailer for service Engine Hours Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE HOURS displays This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run 3 53 Relearn Remote Key This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle 1 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press the set reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds On v
85. injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way 1 24 Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong place A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you 1 25 Q What is wrong with this The belt is over an armrest 1 26 A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests Q What is wrong with this Z CAUTION Pde ho You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your
86. it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Because there are different systems it is important to refer to the instructions that come with the restraint Make sure the child is properly secured following the instructions that came with that restraint 1 45 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 46 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the airbag off switch is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy und
87. less If you are pulling a load or going up hills it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250 F 122 C mark If the gage reaches the 260 F 125 C mark it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity See Engine Overheating on page 5 27 Tire Pressure Light This light comes on briefly when the engine is started This light will also come on when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC may accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so If underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 5 55 for more information If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor System this light will flash for approximately 60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of the ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 62 for more information 3 41 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is an OBD II problem and service is required
88. let you know that the right front passenger s airbag is off See Airbag Off Light on page 3 35 1 73 The airbag off light will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off The right front passenger s airbag will remain off until you turn it back on again A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the airbag it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system The right front passenger s airbag could inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happens do not let anyone whom United States Canada the national government has identified as a ae f member of a passenger airbag risk group To turn the right front passenger s airbag on again sit in the right front passenger s position insert your ignition key into the switch push in for example do not secure a rear facing child and move the switch to the on position restraint in the right front passenger s seat The right front passenger s frontal airbag is now until you have your vehicle serviced See enabled may inflate See Airbag Off Light on page 3 35 Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 34 for for more information additional information 1 74 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and th
89. liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 27 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest A The belt is behind the body 1 28 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it A The belt is twisted across the body Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap shoulder belt Here is how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly ie 2 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt acros
90. mirror s will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R See Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror on page 2 49 for more information Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R DRIVER MIRROR The drivers outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R PASSENGER MIRROR The passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R BOTH MIRRORS The driver s and passenger s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EASY EXIT SEAT If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1 4 for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following set
91. new approach can be tried As the first wheel crosses the obstacle be prepared to alternate the brake and accelerator pedal to maintain control and avoid tire drop off from obstacles Repeat this process for the other wheels For mounds washouts loose up hill slopes ditches etc When wheel spin occurs as the vehicle is moving the driver may notice a slight shaking or shuddering of the vehicle This should be stopped as soon as possible to prevent damage to vehicle components This is the indication that a loss of traction is occurring on this terrain The operator should 1 Reduce speed and apply the brakes 2 Assess the terrain properly and adjust vehicle speed and gear ranges accordingly 4HI position for higher speeds and 4LO LOCK for more torque and lower speeds Transmission FIRST 1 gear is generally recommended 3 Apply slight pressure to the brake when the shaking or shuddering sensation is felt keeping the vehicle moving in a controlled manner 4 Be prepared to alternate between braking and accelerating through the adverse terrain Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different skills Here is what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears nee
92. no disc is present when amp EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio DVD Distortion Video distortion can occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System 3 113 Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen as damage could result Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources radio CDs DVDs or other auxiliary sources However the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to except on some radios where dual control is allowed For example rear 3 114 seat passengers can control and listen to a CD through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of wired headphones You can operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off The front audio system will display the headphone icon when the RSA is on and will
93. odometer reset stem will also display the odometer To switch between English and metric measurements see Units later in this section Trip Odometer Press the trip fuel button until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set reset button while the trip odometer is displayed You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the set reset button for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of miles mi or kilometers km driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 5 miles 8 km before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 5 miles 8 km As the vehicle begins moving the display will then i
94. of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust bass midrange or treble press the dd knob until the tone control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the Jd knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting You can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow D gt FWD forward or lt lt REV reverse button until the desired levels are obtained If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press the Jd knob for more than two seconds EQ Equalization Radio with Six Disc CD Player Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music The choices are pop rock country talk jazz and classical Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings EQ Equalization Radio with CD and DVD Press to change Digital Signal Processing DSP settings Bose
95. on the left side of the steering wheel On Off This button can both activate and turn off the system The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off RES Resume Accelerate Press this button to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously y set speed LN CAUTION SET ds eee ea ne button to set the speed If you leave your cruise control on when you OPA Me Vence Gece erate are not using cruise you might hit a button R Cancel Press this button to cancel cruise control and go into cruise when you do not want to without erasing the set speed from memory You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you Setting Cruise Control want to use cruise control Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low 1 Press the cruise control On Off button The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster 2 Get up to the desired speed will come on after the cruise control has been set to 3 Press the SET button located on the steering the desired speed wheel and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator 3 13 Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This shuts off the cruise control But you do not need to reset it Once you are driving about 25 mph 40 km h or more pr
96. on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It is best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover 4 25 There are also some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it is steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you cannot make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill 4 26 If after stalling you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it set the parking brake put your transmission in PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when y
97. packed the sand is On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers 4 30 Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control Z CAUTION Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water A CAUTION Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe do not try it you probably will not get through Also
98. paper labeled media The player starts loading the disc into the system and show Loading Disc on the radio display At the same time the radio displays a softkey menu of option s Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the softkey menu display which requires the Play Enter or Navigation softkeys to be pressed either by softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control Loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD 3 91 Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system press the Il button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play pause symbol tags displayed on the radio If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD V press the DVD CD AUX button to make DVD V the active source To resume DVD playback press the B Il button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control If the disc has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice on the remote control the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc 3 92 Ejecting a Disc Press the amp button on the radio to eject the dis
99. pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly A CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this CAUTION Continued Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving 1 6 Head Restraints Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the head restraint press the release button located on the top of oN the seatback while you push the head restraint down nn The second and third row seats have head rests that can be adjusted up and down Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupants head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Rear Seats Heated Seats On vehicles with rear outboard heated seats the buttons used to control this feature are located on the Rear Seat Audio RSA panel Driver s Side RSA Heated Seat Button shown 1 8 Ww Heated Seat To heat the seat cushion press the button with the heated seat symbol A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to tu
100. phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable e Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time e Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket pa
101. play MP3 WMA files from the CD R or CD RW you are listening to in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or aloum Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 WMA files recorded to the CD R or CD RW To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label or eject the disc The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again 3 102 Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 WMA files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows If you want to listen to MP3 WMA files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label Fro
102. remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you Contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage
103. requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the pa
104. s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 47 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 1 59 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 46 There is a switch in the glove box that you can use to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag See Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 for more on this including important safety information A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 60 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
105. serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As the details show on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they are working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there is a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on as you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your vehicle s warning lights and gages They can be a big help Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with warning lights and gages See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information 3 31 Instrument Panel Cluster mamla m mjam aalam aja alaaa mimma a alala alaaa maaala a United States version shown Canada similar Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You wi
106. setscrew and tighten to 7 ft Ib 9Nem See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for what lubricant to use g Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 24 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed k Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Your dealer retailer can assist you with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any flu
107. settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 68 CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL The chime volume will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain There is no default for chime volume The volume will stay at the last known setting To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC PARK TILT MIRRORS If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select whether or not the outside
108. that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change the oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on reset the system Always reset the engine oil life to 100 after every oil change It will not reset itself To reset the Engine Oil Life System 1 Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC 2 Press and hold the SET RESET button on the DIC for more than five seconds The oil life will change to 100 If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle the Engine Oil Life System has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Us
109. the lamp out 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp housing A Stoplamp Taillamp 3 Remove the bulb from the bulb socket B Turn Signal Lamp 4 Install a new bulb into the bulb socket C Back Up Lamp 5 Place the hook end of the lamp in place on one side and push the other end of the lamp down until it locks in place To replace one of these bulbs 1 Open the liftgate or tailgate See Liftgate SUV on page 2 13 or Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier on page 2 16 for more information 2 If your vehicle has the taillamp guard remove it by removing the four retaining screws Do not remove the plastic retainers 3 Remove the two screws from the rear lamp assembly and remove the rear lamp assembly 5 52 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp housing Pull the bulb straight out from the socket Press a new bulb into the socket insert it into the taillamp housing and turn the socket counterclockwise until it is locked in place Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the screws Reinstall the taillamp guard by lining up the guard with the holes in vehicle Then install and tighten the four screws Your vehicle may have a taillamp in the bumper Replacement Bulbs 1 Locate the affected Sn eae Bumper To replace it Taillamp and Stoplamp 3057K Rear Taillamp in Bumper 3057K Rear Turn Signal Lamp 3156K Roof Marker Lamp Center
110. the Seatback Unfolding the Seatback To fold the seatback do the following A CAUTION still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts If the seatback is not locked it could move and return them to their normal stowed position forward in a sudden stop or crash That could before folding a rear seat cause injury to the person sitting there Always 1 Pull up on the release push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is lever labeled 1 located locked on the rear of the seatback and push the seatback forward To return the seatback to the passenger position do the following 1 Pull up on the release lever labeled 1 and N then pull up on the seatback until the Sha seatback locks into A the upright position 2 Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked into position 1 11 Tilting the Seat 1 Fold the seatback forward using the instructions listed previously 2 Unlatch the seat from the floor by pulling up on the lever labeled 2 located on the rear of the seat 3 Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor and push it forward until it locks into place You will not be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the seatback is folded down The seat will now remain locked in the upright position Returning the Seat from a Tilted to an Upright Position A CAUTION If the seatback i
111. the airbag on See Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 for more on this including important safety information A CAUTION If the right front passenger s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag Ina crash the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Do not turn off the passenger s airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group identified by the national government See Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 for more on this including important safety information 3 36 A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the airbag it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system The right front passenger s airbag could inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happens do not let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in the right front passenger s position for example do not secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat until you have your vehicle serviced See Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 and Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 34 for more on this including important safety information If the word ON or the on symbol is lit it means that the right front passenger s frontal airbag is enabled may inflate S
112. the center to the edge 3 83 Care of Your CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD or DVD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen instead The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section 3 84 amp EJECT or CD Eject Press and release this button to eject the disc that is currently playing ACD ejecting from a radio with CD and DVD ejects from the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The disc can be removed If the disc is not removed after several seconds the disc automatically pulls back into the player For the Six Disc CD player press and hold this button for two seconds to eject all discs A DVD Ej
113. the driver that the vehicle is overloaded If the rear suspension remains at a low height the rear axle load has exceeded GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating When the overload protection mode is activated the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one minute without raising the vehicle depending on the amount of overload This will continue each time the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced below GAWR The system may reactivate without cycling the ignition if some of the excess load is removed If the total rear GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is reached the suspension may be slightly less than level This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the air suspension In some instances the compressor may stop working due to being overheated This is normal In the instance of an abnormal overheat condition though the compressor will stop working and the SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM will be displayed on the DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information Towing a Trailer A CAUTION If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehi
114. the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Audio Video A V Jacks The A V jacks located on the rear of the floor console allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Adapter connectors or cables not included might be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper usage The A V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equipment The yellow jack A is for the video input The white jack B is for the left audio input The red jack C is for the right audio input Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system 3 107 To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If the video screen is in the DVD player mode pressing the AUX auxiliary button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary See Radio s MP3 on page 3 75 for more information How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings
115. the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 2 57 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming You only need the original remote control transmitter for Fixed Code programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming 2 58 Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to www learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before you begin If you do not follow these actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure To program up to three devices 1 From inside the vehicle p
116. them The label depicting lock and unlock positions e is located near the lock Security Lock Label shown To set the locks do the following 1 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position 2 Close the door To open a rear door when the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the by lifting the rear door manual lock the power door lock switch or if the vehicle has one by using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 2 Open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open If the driver s side power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock If the passenger s side power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the passenger s door will unlock Liftgate SUV A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can not see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must
117. to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside This happens after the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 67 APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following
118. too high or if the oil pressure gets low Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 for additional information If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons see your dealer retailer to enable or disable the remote vehicle start system Doors and Locks Door Locks A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued e Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle To unlock the door from the outside use the keyless entry system or the key To unlock or lock the door
119. up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover 4 28 e Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over When driving across an incline that is not too steep the vehicle can hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This
120. used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio Your vehicle may have one outlet located inside the storage bin below the climate control system one outlet inside the center floor console and two outlets on the rear of the center floor console The outlet located inside the storage bin below the climate control system can only use equipment that does not exceed 15 amperes Notice Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 15 ampere rating There may also be an accessory power outlet located in the rear of the vehicle near the liftgate To use an accessory power outlet remove the protective cap When not in use always cover the accessory power outlet with the protective cap 3 20 If your vehicle is the SUT model there is an accessory power outlet in the rear cargo area on the passenger side of the vehicle Notice Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlets and could result in blown vehicle or adapter f
121. vehicle The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound three times Press and hold 2 for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or is pressed again The ignition must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer retailer All transmitters need to be re coded to match the new transmitter The lost transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters are re coded The vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons on page 3 49 or DIC Operation and Displays Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem on page 3 54 for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC See REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for additional information Notice When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace t
122. vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your truck can carry Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way 4 49 If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to 4 50 There is also important loading inf
123. will automatically unlock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 11 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER AT KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 65 REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this fe
124. you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark 5 26 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the surge tank but only when the engine is cool A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When replacing the pressure cap make sure it is hand tight and fully seated Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice f the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 40 In addition you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message in the Driver Information Center DIC on the instrument panel See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A CAUTION Steam from an overheated e
125. 1 72 Global Window Switch See Power Windows on page 2 20 Exterior Lamps Control See Exterior Lamps on page 3 15 Dome Lamp Override Button See Dome Lamp Override on page 3 19 Instrument Panel Brightness Control See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 18 Heated Windshield Washer Control If Equipped See Windshield Washer on page 3 10 L OZs85 v Cruise Control Buttons See Cruise Control on page 3 12 Tilt Lever See Tilt Wheel on page 3 6 Horn See Horn on page 3 6 Full Time Four Wheel Drive Buttons See Full Time Four Wheel Drive on page 2 36 Locking Rear Axle See Locking Rear Axle on page 4 6 Tow Haul Selector Button See Tow Haul Mode on page 2 36 Traction Control TCS Button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 5 Ride Height Selector Button If Equipped See Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height on page 4 53 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 32 Accessory Power Outlet See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 20 Climate Control System See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 Audio System See Audio System s on page 3 72 Glove Box See Glove Box on page 2 64 Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning flashers warn others They also let the police and other emergency vehicles know you have a problem The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of the steering column Press the button to make the front and
126. 2008 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual MA Seats and Restraint Systems 006 1 1 Front Seats wssschacsastiixemuaialalshaetacudarsuauys 1 2 Rear Seats oo eeceececccecsseseccueeeeeueeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 8 Safety Bels ccececescicsesdtinawecvaneagiareniaciaveviers 1 16 Child Restraints anononnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnenne 1 36 Airbag System ci seetes cateosies Mveedaadas heikai 1 64 Restraint System Check oo 0 ce eeeee eee ee eee 1 76 Features and Controls cccccccesseeeseeeeeenees 2 1 Keys Cermee er e e a a A RA 2 3 Doors andi Loeks iscscscacieieaevaeleiessarisciesachows 2 10 WINdOWS no eee cece cee ee cee eec anadai 2 19 Theft Deterrent Systems eee eee eee eee 2 24 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 28 MIOS sesccisanecsessdaveese ccacevcsavenenedsens ceva cere 2 45 Object Detection Systems on eeeeeeeeee eee 2 50 OnStar System oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 53 Universal Home Remote System _ 2 57 Storage Areas gresci arannana a ESA 2 64 SUN OOL agncctecsecdsecad csedsumuacwecheutedsaecisaaevnton 2 67 Instrument Panel 00 cccccceeeee sees sees eeeeeeae es 3 1 Instrument Panel Overview eceeceeeeeeees 3 Climate Controls evcecccicsiee cosa eiiseaasetec anes 3 22 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators _ 3 31 Driver Information Center DIC ow 3 49 Audio System s Driving Your Vehicle
127. 6 XM Radio Messages ivscicicvtiieectissdos cceataies 3 103 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 118 Your Vehicle and the Environment 00 6 2
128. C Radios with a Single CD player or radios with a Six Disc player displays CHECK DISC and or ejects the CD if an error occurs Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other messages when an error occurs Optical Error The disc was inserted upside down Disk Read Error A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format Player Error There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT problems e Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There could have been a problem while burning the CD e The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a Known good CD Radios with a CD and DVD player displays If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer retailer when reporting the problem 3 87 Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control or by the RSA system or by the buttons on the radio faceplate See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 and Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 114 for more information The DVD playe
129. C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 5 73 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retail
130. Covered Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle operator regardless of ownership In Canada a person driving the vehicle without the consent of the owner is not eligible for coverage Services Provided The following services are provided in the U S and Canada up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever occurs first and in Canada only up to a maximum coverage of 100 These services are provided at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no longer in the Powertrain warranty e Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station approximately 5 in Canada For safety reasons propane and other alternate fuels will not be provided through this service e Lock out Service Lock out service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle A remote unlock may be available if you have an active OnStar subscription To ensure security the driver must present personal identification before lock out service is provided In Canada the vehicle registration is also required e Emergency Tow from a Public Roadway or Highway Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle disabling crash e Flat Tire Change Installation of a spare tire in good condition when equipped and properly inflated will be covered at no charge The customer is responsible for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered by a warrant
131. D V is inserted into the DVD slot gt iil Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on display the system is in playback mode If the DVD screen is off press the play button to turn the screen on Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have finished although there could be a delay of up to 30 seconds If the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically press the pushbutton located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio If the DVD still does not play refer to the on screen instructions if available 3 90 HM Stop Press this button to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD lt Enter Press this button to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the pushbuttons located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu After making a selection press this button This button only operates when using a DVD Nav Navigate Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus amp gt Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing a
132. E 3 6 and Electronic Climate Controls 3 29 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever seeee 3 7 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 31 Turn and Lane Change Signals 3 8 Instrument Panel Cluster 00000c0ceseeeeeeeeees 3 32 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 3 8 Speedometer and Odometer 0 cceee 3 33 FlaSN tO PASS seeeeeeeeetee ete tet ete tteeteetee 3 9 Trip Odometer cccceeeeecccccecceeeesesaeeeeeeeeeees 3 33 Windshield Wipers seer e tees eeeeneeees 3 9 TACHOMGIE seirene nena d te eT 3 33 Windshield Washer s ssssssssssssessesitesesneneennn 3 10 Safety Belt Reminders 0 cccseeeeeee 3 33 Rear Window WIperAWaSher s is ot Airbag Readiness Light 2 ssc ceseseseeseees 3 34 Cruise CONIO 20 0 cece cece ec ee enei aeea ae raii 3 12 Airbag Off Light i cccsssissesccasceasssansvendevesensvtaes 3 35 Exterior Lamps Selene eteeesteeetteeerteeeeeeeeeenes 3 15 Charging System Light 0 0 cccceseceeeseeeeeeee 3 37 Headlamps on Reminder scene 3 17 Voltmeter Gago asmirrmusisi siranus 3 37 Daytime Running Lamps DRL s s11151512 3 17 Brake System Warning Light 000e 3 38 Automatic Headlamp SYSTEM osadi pisania 3 18 Antilock Brake System Warning Light 3 39 Instrument Panel Brightness see 3 18 StabiliTrak Indicator Light cccceeeeeeee 3 40
133. EVEL half full but it actually took a little more LOW message on the Driver Information Center or less than half the tank s capacity to fill see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for the tank more information When you add fuel this light and message should go off If it does not have e The gage goes back to empty when you your vehicle serviced turn off the ignition 3 48 Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC displays information about your vehicle It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected All messages will appear in the DIC display located below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off For the displays available using DIC buttons see DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons later in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 For the displays available using the trip odometer reset stem see DIC Operation and Displays Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem later in this section DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system informatio
134. Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information 2 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick If the fluid level is not within the HOT band and the transmission temperature is between 160 F and 200 F 71 C and 93 C add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band If the fluid level is low add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5L Do not overfill If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 5 23 Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedures described Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If fluid is added it may take 15 minutes or longer to obtain an accurate reading because of residual fluid draining down the dipstick tube If inconsistent readings persist check the transmission breather to be sure it is clean and not clogged If readings are still inconsiste
135. FADE label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position press the Jd knob for more than two seconds Finding a Category CAT Station CAT Category The CAT button is used to find XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode To find XM channels within a desired category perform the following 1 Press the BAND button until the XM frequency displays Press the CAT button to display the category labels Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays e Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the category list by pressing the lt 1 REV button or the X FWD button 2 Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 3 Turn the J knob press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed or press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or to the next XM station within the selected category 4 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category perform the following 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label 3 Turn the J knob to display the categor
136. Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheating the transmission If you suspect a small leak then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level However if there is a large leak then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer retailer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the Maintenance Schedule See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Before checking the fluid level prepare your vehicle as follows 1 Start the engine and park your vehicle on a level surface Keep the engine running 2 Apply the parking brake and plac
137. Foreign Countries 0c eeeeeeeeee ee 5 6 GAG Gs Sree acne acct E E 3 47 Gasoline Octane irruere iaire aian 5 5 Gasoline Specifications cceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 5 Low Warning Light ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee 3 48 Fuses Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 112 Fuses and Circuit Breakers eeeeeee 5 110 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 006 5 111 Underhood Fuse Block eceeeeeeeeee eee 5 113 Windshield Wiper eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 5 110 Gage Engine Coolant Temperature 0 ceeeeeee 3 40 Fuel costae arcana cneauaeuits eines a adinceceeaaaeinene 3 47 Oil Pr SSUre 20 0 6 cece ee cec eannan e aana 3 45 Speedometer ess stesverd cessiecestecseeskoaceeraceseeney 3 33 Tachometer si stakiteceredclerenevi Meaiehivkenivadeoeiees 3 33 Voltmeter Gage ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeaeeaes 3 37 Garage Door Opener ccceeeeeeeeeneee een eeeeenes 2 57 Gasoline OCtANG e E EEEE 5 5 Specifications cece eeee see eee a dEn Rina 5 5 Glove BOX ssssssssssnsssrresrrerrrnerrnerrnerrnrrrnerrrerrnn 2 64 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 6 5 7 6 Hazard Warning Flashers eeceeeeeeeeee eens 3 6 Head Restraints ssccscsdacnacasndonntresntathessiradieanaan 1 7 Headlamps ccciccsscsitcaeei cet cansensncy ein annaas 5 48 Bulb Replacement seeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 48 Daytime Running La
138. LOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it does not operate and LOC LOCK or LOCKED could display With THEFTLOCK activated the radio does not operate if stolen 3 116 Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on your vehicle s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel They include the following V A Next Previous Press the down or up arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio station stored as a favorite When a CD DVD is playing press either arrow to go to the next or previous track or chapter Mute Voice Recognition Press and release this button to silence the vehicle speakers only The audio of the wireless and wired headphones if your vehicle has these features does not mute Press and release this button again to turn the sound on If your vehicle has the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information If your vehicle has OnStar press and hold this button for longer than one second to interact with the OnStar system If your vehicle also has the navigation system press and hold this button for longer tha
139. MP3 Format If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer e Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc e Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc 3 94 Make sure the CD does not have more than a maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists and 255 files Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to 8 subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions might not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names ora combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions If you wish to play a large number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off Finalize the audio disc before you burn it Trying to add music to an existing disc may cause the disc not to function in the player Playlists can be changed by u
140. N CONTROL OFF SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL STABILITRAK OFF SERVICE STABILITRAK If these DIC messages appear make sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off using the StabiliTrak on off button If this clears the message s your vehicle does not need servicing If this does not clear the message s then turn the vehicle off wait 15 seconds and then turn it back on again to reset the system If any of these messages still appear on the Driver Information Center DIC your vehicle should be taken in for service For more information on the DIC messages see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 49 The StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on 22 and activated You may also feel or hear the system working this is normal The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if both systems traction control and StabiliTrak were previously on To disable both traction control and StabiliTrak press and hold the button for five seconds Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not automatically shut off for any other reason 4 8 When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off
141. N REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE Full Time Four Wheel Drive This message displays if a problem occurs with the Full Time Four Wheel Drive system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving there is a problem with the Full Time Four Wheel Drive system See your dealer retailer for service 3 59 SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer retailer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 34 and Airbag System on page 1 64 for more information SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instru
142. NGINE COOLANT HOT message with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the windows as necessary 2 If you are in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving DRIVE D If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning does not come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues and you have not stopped pull over stop and park your vehicle right away 5 28 If there is still no sign of steam push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you are parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Driving extended miles km and or t
143. Oil Life System eeeeeeeee eee 5 16 Older Children Restraints cccceceeeeeeees 1 36 Online Owner Center cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeee eee eees 7 4 OnStar Privacy 222sc3sichoncetecaonsesdhceeaebes seeeinsse 7 17 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 53 Operation Universal Home Remote System 2 57 Other Warning Devices 6 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tees 3 6 Outlet Adjustment cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 29 Outlets Accessory POWET 2 ceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeerenees 3 20 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror eeeeeeeee ees 2 49 CONVEX MINOR kissret eron tennen taena 2 49 Heated MIOrS ai cacsacs eikenisctianciesntncnbertenedesas 2 49 Power Foldaway Mirrors ceeeeeeeeeee eens 2 48 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 28 Owner Checks and Services eeceeeeeeeee eens 6 8 Owners Canadian ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeees ii Paint Damage sesiicsivieisteieanscstsauiae ea 5 107 Park Aldie reinan E a 2 50 Park Brake enean e a en EnaA aa 2 40 Park P SMN IMO setmane nn Enar EE 2 41 Shifting OUTOD secs caceseesneauicemeniencateactecsyecesth 2 42 Parking Over Things That Burn ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 43 PASSING dereer E E E E 4 12 PASS Key IE cccesscscocscesteceeeevieuseereeractcossesses 2 26 PASS Key Ill Operation cccccceeeeeeeneeeees 2 26 Perchlorate Materials Requir
144. Power RAP on page 2 29 near the sides of the cargo area These drains should The switch used to operate the sunroof is located in the be cleaned periodically to allow water to exit the overhead console cargo area 2 67 Express Open Close Sunroof The sunroof has a feature which allows the sunroof panel to be opened or closed without continuously pressing the switch The express open can be stopped at any time by pushing the front of the switch a second time The sunroof has four positions e Comfort open stop To open the sunroof and sunshade press the rear of the switch quickly and release The glass panel will open to an interim position that reduces wind noise For information on using the sunshade see Sunshade Operation later e Full open stop To open the sunroof further press the rear of the switch quickly once more e Express close To close the sunroof press the front of the switch quickly and release e Vent The vent position allows the rear of the sunroof to be opened and tilted upward With the sunroof in the fully closed position press and hold the front of the switch until the sunroof reaches the desired vent position or until it stops moving To close the sunroof from the vent position press and hold the rear of the switch until the sunroof is fully closed Do not leave the sunroof open for long periods of time as debris may collect in the tracks 2 68 Anti Pinch Protection Feature If somet
145. RSE R for one second then shift the transmission to DRIVE D for one second 8 Turn the ignition to ACC ACCESSORY which will turn the engine off 9 Place the transmission shift lever in PARK P 10 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle 11 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF Dae 2 39 Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal 2 Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N and turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off 3 Turn the transfer case dial to Four Wheel High Four Wheel High Lock or Four Wheel Low Lock After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out 4 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging your vehicle always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear 5 Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position 2 40 Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot A chime will activate and the warning light will flash when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 3 mph 5 km h for at least three se
146. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range The gage may also read low during the fuel economy mode this is normal 3 37 Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create full power If there is a problem with the battery charging system this light will come on or the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM DIC message will display See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 and Charging System Light on page 3 37 for more information Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on the brake system warning light will come on when you set the parking brake If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 3 38 Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away This light may also come on du
147. Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 008 1 76 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash siiderin miian nenia 1 77 Retained Accessory Power RAP ccecce 2 29 Ride Height Selectable Extended Rear Ride 4 53 Roadside Assistance Program seceeeeeeeneeeee tense teens 7 6 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 40 Routing Engine Drive Belt eee 6 15 Running the Engine While Parked 2 44 Safety Belt Reminder LiQhtisssicecc ssieacniat inchiadeetendics theese 3 33 Safety Belts Care Of sseccacicieiesleaoeedaudeviesis we es aE EAT 5 103 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 22 Lap Shoulder Belt ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 30 Safety Belt Extender c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 35 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 35 Safety Belts Are for Everyone s es 1 16 Safety Warnings and Symbols 0 0eeeeeeees iii Scheduled Maintenance cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 4 Seats Head Restraints cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 Heated Seats ccsacenidiidinniwieenes 1 4 Heated Seats Rear eccere 1 8 Memory Mirrors 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Power Lumbarr ccisscvsatieg iiaa 1 3 Power Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 5 Power Seats j sssciscsdiytencseevedoel enr e E ETETE EREE 1 2 Split Folding Rear Seat nnnc 1 8 Third R
148. S 2 ccccccececeeeeete ees ereeceeeeteeence 4 40 First Aid Kit and Tool Kit 0 eceeeeeeee 4 42 Front Mounted Receiver seeeeeeeeeneeeees 4 43 Power Winch Platform e eeeeeeeeeeeees 4 43 Loading Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 44 TOWING 2evccccctategaacestiadstanteradtncanents hn veneebanserees 4 51 Towing Your Vehicle cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 51 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeee 4 51 Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height 4 53 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension SYSTE ae Eea E A E EEEE 4 54 TOWING a Trail r c cccce cae caceeeeneeteeeeeeenee ees ene 4 55 Trailer Recommendations eeeeeeeee es 4 67 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Everyone on page 1 16 A CAUTION Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Dri
149. SS Key Ill Operation cccccseeeeeeeeees 2 26 Third Row Seat cccceeeececeeceeeeeeeneeeseeeeeees 1 10 Tt WASE l elenna ainar ennari 3 6 Tim S HING sseccscssevenee sievevesscieeensacss veeesssaveeescs 3 73 12 Tire Pressure EIQ tics ccastncsncaccceesonetennesntbanmees 3 41 TWGS scl E E E dinciieeesn T 5 55 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 0 0 006 5 106 Buying New Tires cciseaiiasnoruiriu seierranas 5 70 GRAINS se2echccsdenddainatterssensese ste sierselaueeassaenyees 5 75 Changing a Flat Tire cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 5 78 Cleaning sssi iaee ea ENEE 5 106 Different SIZ 0 cece ee cec eee eee sence eeeeeeeeeees 5 72 If a Tire Goes Flat wssccitiesccctetsaeccsiieecee ances 5 78 Inflation Tire Pressure i 5 61 Inflator Accessory ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 76 Inspection and Rotation cceeeeeee eee 5 67 Installing the Spare Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 88 Pressure Monitor Operation 0 eeeeeeee 5 64 Pressure Monitor System ceeeeeeeeeee ees 5 62 Removing the Flat Tire o n 5 88 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 80 5 84 opare TING Sai iae ninaa aa a EGA 5 99 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 94 5 96 Tire Sidewall Labeling csceeeseeeeeeeeeees 5 56 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 58 Uniform Tire Quality Grading cee 5 72 Wheel Alignment a
150. Seat and Mirrors Driver s Seat with Power Seat Control Power on page 1 4 for more information Recline and Power Lumbar shown 1 2 Power Lumbar If the seats have power lumbar the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats e To increase lumbar support press and hold the front of the control e To decrease lumbar support press and hold the rear of the control e To raise the height of the lumbar support press and hold the top of the control e To lower the height of the lumbar support press and hold the bottom of the control Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1 4 for more information Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support Adjust the seat as needed Heated Seats On vehicles with heated front seats the controls are located on the driver s and passenger s doors Heated Seatback Press to turn on the heated seatback e Heated Seat and Seatback Press to turn on the heated seat and seatback The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is working Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heat to the seat off Ind
151. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location Notice e When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water e Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid e Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full e Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s windshield washer system and paint 5 35 Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the reservoir DOT 3 AR There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system If it is you should have the brake hydraulic system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well 5 36 It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not
152. See your dealer retailer if a replacement key or additional key is needed Notice If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you are locked out of your vehicle call the Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in operating range This is normal for any RKE system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this e Check the distance You may be too
153. Spare Tire and Tools SUV 5 96 Spare Tire cc cceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 99 Appearance Care l a 5 100 Interior CleANiNg issiresccie nese aie 5 100 Fabric Carpet ss ccccascucwneesmcdseemediagest eacenaaticas 5 101 Leather tc ctsat ccateiiesavains aati ataticwesseansaeanuaan 5 102 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUrfACES aecenas 5 102 Wood Panels sicr size cece tesaetdoneenees heacdeceinn R 5 103 5 2 Service and Appearance Care Speaker Covers ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 103 Care of Safety Belts cceeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 103 WeatherstripS 0 cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 5 103 Washing Your Vehicle cceeeeeeeeee nee es 5 103 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 0055 5 104 Finish Care oiae e e se esas asticcgesesn 5 104 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 105 Aluminum Wheels 2 ceeeeeeeereereeeeeeeee 5 106 EIE E E ET A hieaenedaniesaweeene 5 106 Sheet Metal Damage seseeeeeeeee teen ees 5 106 Finish Damage iaer aN 5 107 Underbody Maintenance seeeeeee eee 5 107 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeeeeees 5 107 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 108 Vehicle Identification eee 5 109 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 109 Service Parts Identification Label 5 109 Electrical System
154. UN or ACC ACCESSORY or while Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 The window can also be operated using the global window buttons See Global Window Feature previously 2 22 A CAUTION If express override is activated the midgate window will not reverse automatically You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged Before you use express override make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the midgate window path Midgate Window Express Override Mode If an obstruction or weather condition such as severe icing stops the window as it is moving upward the window will automatically reverse to a partially open position The window will return to normal operation once the obstruction or condition is removed The window auto reversal function can be overridden in the express override mode To override the window must be operated manually by pressing and holding the Midgate window switch or the global window button This must be done within two seconds after the Midgate window has stopped at a partially open position The express override mode only works immediately following a window auto reversal Window express functions will not work while in this mode Midgate Window Error Jog Mode If the Midgate window has sensed conditions which may lead to damage or malfunction of the window system the window will automatically go into Error Jog
155. VG ECONOMY press and hold the set reset button Fuel Used Press the trip fuel button until FUEL USED displays This display shows the number of gallons gal or liters L of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the set reset button while FUEL USED is displayed Timer Press the trip fuel button until TIMER displays This display can be used as a timer To start the timer press the set reset button while TIMER is displayed The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will return to zero 3 52 To stop the timer press the set reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the set reset button while TIMER is displayed Transmission Temperature Press the trip fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C Blank Display This display shows no information Vehicle Information Menu Items i Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Oil Life Press the
156. Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning A CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you do not you or others could be hurt A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do Not do this or Do Not let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings You will also find notices in this manual Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty and it could be costly The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats ecaa i 1 2 Power Sea
157. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose are no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 3 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it 5 32 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold If necessary repeat coolant fill procedure steps 1 through 7 Engine Fan Noise If your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan when the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages so you may h
158. able The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan switch will override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed D On Off Press this button to turn off the climate control system Outside air will still enter the vehicle and will be directed to the floor This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button Recirculation can be selected once you have selected vent or bi level mode The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature button If you adjust the air delivery mode or temperature settings with the system off the display will illuminate briefly to show you the settings and then return off Press the on off button or the up down arrows on the fan switch the defrost button AUTO button or the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off Manual Operation The air delivery mode or fan speed can be manually adjusted using these buttons Fan Use the fan buttons to manually adjust the fan speed To increase or decrease the airflow Sok press the or button Pressing one of these buttons when the system is off will turn the system on Pressing one of these buttons when in automatic control will place the fan under manual control The fan setting remains displayed AUTO is no longer displayed and the AUTO button indicator light turns off The air delivery mode will remain under automatic control ad Mode Use the mode buttons to ma
159. able failure e Jump Start A battery jump start is covered at no charge if the vehicle does not start e Trip Routing Service Upon request Roadside Assistance will send you detailed computer personalized maps highlighting your choice of either the most direct route or the most scenic route to your destination anywhere in North America along with helpful travel information pertaining to your trip Please allow three weeks before your planned departure date In Canada trip routing requests will be limited to six per calendar year e Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km warranty period Items covered are hotel meals and rental car HUMMER and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in their sole discretion the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence HUMMER Technician Roadside Service U S only HUMMER s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service It provides every HUMMER owner in the United States with the advantage of contacting a HUMMER advisor and where available a HUMMER trained dealer technician who can provide on site service A dealer technician will travel to your location generally within a 30 mile radius of a participating HUMMER dealershi
160. according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts 3 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 47 for how to install your child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lo
161. actice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife This includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground e Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving e Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns e Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But you will want to know how to use it properly High Mobility Characteristics The HUMMER H2 has a 10 inch 25 4 cm running ground clearance A and a 9 inch 22 8 cm axle to ground clearance B while maintaining a low silhouette and a low center of gravity fy 3 a R U 1 D jT S ox s x N77 NSN BUY RR A E 5 ERA
162. ading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire
163. adio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save your radio 4 Open the hoods and locate the positive and negative terminal locations of the other vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use these remote terminals instead of the terminals on the battery The remote positive terminal is located near the engine accessory drive bracket On some vehicles the terminal may be covered by a red plastic cover To access the remote positive terminal open the cover if equipped The remote negative terminal is located on the engine accessory drive bracket and is marked GND Ground See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on the location of the remote terminals 5 41 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a A CAUTION shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some Using a match near a battery can cause battery basic things you should know Positive will go to gas to explode People have been hurt doing positive or to a remote positive terminal if this and some have been blinded Use a the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy flashlight if you need more light unpainted metal engine part or to a rem
164. adio frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate number is KOBGTVO6A This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device The Canadian Registration ID number is 3521A GTVO6A Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System If there are three round Light Emitting Diode LED indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have
165. ag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact In a rollover event roof rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll 1 69 What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positions How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually
166. age 2 24 This light comes on y whenever you set the cruise control The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 12 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 for more information Tow Haul Mode Light This light comes on when the Tow Haul mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode on page 2 36 Fuel Gage Canada United States The fuel gage when the ignition is on tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel and you should get more fuel as soon as possible When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW Low Fuel Warning Light message will appear in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information This light under the fuel gage will come Here are some situations you may experience with on briefly when you your fuel gage None of these indicate a problem are starting the engine with the fuel gage e At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full e It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example This light and a chime will come on when the fuel the gage may have indicated the tank was tank is low on fuel There will also be a FUEL L
167. an cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because the surface could be damaged Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels 5 106 Notice lf you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes you could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore c
168. an help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal near frontal or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if your vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event Pretensioners work only once If they activate in a crash you will need to get new ones and probably other new parts for your safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 77 1 32 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outboard position in the second and third row seat Here is how to install the comfort guide to the shoulder belt 1 Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seat 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat edges of the belt into the slots of the guide The guide must be on top of the belt 1 33 A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder an
169. and Rotation on page 5 67 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 6 9 Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section Inspect suspension and steering components See footnote b i Inspect engine cooling system See footnote c a ee Inspect restraint system components See footnote e Inspect wiper blades See footnote d Lubricate body components See footnote f Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers KCLON 000 e200 000 025 00 000 180 0 000 200 000 000 2w wo 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter Severe service See footnote h Change automatic ana al fluid and filter normal service Change transfer case fluid See footnote g Replace
170. and flat tire are inside the the appropriate tire as previously shown To use tool bag the wheel blocks Remove the wheel blocks from the tool bag Then lift the wheel block as shown to lock it into place A Jack Handle D Wheel Wrench B Jack Handle Extension Extensions 2 E Wheel Blocks 2 C Wheel Wrench 5 85 Removing the Jack SUV The jack is stored in the rear cargo area on the driver side 2 Insert the wheel wrench into the hole and turn it counterclockwise to release it 3 Grasp and lift the jack out of the bracket 1 To access the jack pull on the two latches to remove the trim cover 5 86 Removing the Spare Tire SUV The spare tire is attached to the tire carrier To remove the spare tire In order to remove the spare tire you may need someone to assist you 1 Open the tire carrier See Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier on page 2 16 for tire carrier operation 2 Unscrew the wing nut on the back of the tire carrier Nr TON ait WT a al i z gai i N ees Pull off the license plate holder from the spare tire Attach the wheel wrench to the wheel wrench extender to remove the wheel nuts Turn the wheel wrench with the wheel wrench extender counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Jack SUV and SUT 1 Do a safety check before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 for more informati
171. and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include e Allow extra following distance e Pass with caution e Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape e Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoi
172. ar brake system warning light is also on you do not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 38 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for all brake related DIC messages For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light will come on briefly when you start the engine 3 39 StabiliTrak Indicator Light A ee If equipped this warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started If the warning light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If it stays on or comes on when you are driving there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak system and your vehicle may need service When this warning light is on the system is off and will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak system is active If the StabiliTrak system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service See StabiliTrak System on page 4 7 for more information 3 40 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working During a majority of the operation the gage will read 210 F 100 C or
173. are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know 1 22 Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move ma OND _ gt forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body Q The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way 1 23 Q What is wrong with this Z CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal
174. arry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight 4 60 Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a GVWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg anda GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be GCWR Vehicle Weight Trailer Rating 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 886 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 lbs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 lbs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 Ibs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg But let s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with so
175. arthest clockwise position turns on the dome lamps Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened and turns off when all doors are closed The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob located next to the exterior lamps control clockwise to the farthest position In this position the dome lamps will remain on whether a door is opened or closed Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control wo Dome Off Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened Entry Exit Lighting Your vehicle has an illuminated entry exit feature When a door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the out position Reading Lamps There are reading lamps located in the overhead console and on the DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system console if equipped Press the button located next to each lamp to turn it on or off These lamps will also come on with the dome lamps Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK This will help prevent the battery from running down 3 19 Accessory Power Outlet s Accessory power outlets can be
176. at leaves streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide e Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while cleaning e Damage to your vehicle s interior may result from the use of many organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For soils always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed e For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean use the following instructions 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water 5 101 If any of the so
177. ature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain 3 66 To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on t
178. ause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid e If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 103 5 37 Brake Wear Your vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly A CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair 5 38 Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pu
179. automatically when you start your vehicle It will activate and the StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving If you turn off traction control only the brake traction control portion of traction control will work The engine speed management will be disabled In this mode engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate constantly Notice If you allow the wheel s of one axle to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS and brake warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK message are displayed you could damage the transfer case The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and this message are displayed The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration or may hear a noise or vibration This is normal If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to use cruise again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 3 12 StabiliTrak may a
180. aximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations The balance fade and tone settings that were previously adjusted are stored with the favorite stations To store a station as a favorite perform the following steps 1 Tune to the desired radio station 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds When that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favorite The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button To setup the number of favorites pages perform the following steps 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 label 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process
181. aying an MP3 Wait for the message to insert a disc label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD R or CD RW in the player it stays in the player When you turn on the ignition or radio the CD R or CD RW starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays 3 96 amp EJECT Press this button to eject CD R s or CD RW s To eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing For multiple discs press and hold this button for two seconds to eject all discs JJ Tune Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW currently playing Ki SEEK I Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 file if more than ten seconds have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD lt Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previo
182. aylist available and a Music Navigator tag If a Playlist tag is shown toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey only or the menu as previously described If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD R or CD RW in the player it stays in the player When you turn on the ignition or radio the CD R starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays 4 cD Eject Press and release this button to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject A DVD Eject Press and release this button to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails
183. b Replacement ecseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 48 Daytime Running Lamps eeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 50 Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps 5 49 Halogen BUDS sssr orense anani 5 48 Headlamps sireisas one a aE ENEDA 5 48 Bulb Replacement cont Replacement Bulbs s eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 53 Roof Marker Lamps seeeceeeeeneeeee teeters 5 50 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up LAMPS ceceeeeeee eee ee nee asas 5 51 Buying New TireS ccceeeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeneees 5 70 Calibration simien atic eet anaa 2 45 Galifornia Fuel issnin omenen eani 5 5 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 California Proposition 65 Warning eeeeeeee 5 3 Canadian Owners cceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees ii Capacities and Specifications ceeeee 5 117 Carbon Monoxide 2 14 2 16 2 43 4 36 4 55 Care of Safety Belts isi tcnshercsietiecd iieteneecleekeese 5 103 Cargo Area All Weather 0 ceceeeeeeee eens 2 66 Cargo Tie DOWNS sisimercriss iesea msaani dante nti 2 65 CD MPS rn inas a a ara Eaa 3 94 3 98 Center Console Storage Area eccess 2 64 Chains TIE searereii naa a AA 5 75 Charging System Light sesseseeeeeseeeeeeereenenn 3 37 Check Engine Light sr ducsscnsibedesatisieetssreiteagentacesad ten 3 42 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 9 Chemical Paint Spotting
184. ble to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle A CAUTION When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps off and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag e Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts e Your vehicle has a
185. c If a disc is ejected from the radio but not removed the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time The disc is stored in the radio The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically If the RSA system is sourced to the DVD the movie when reloaded into the DVD player begins to play again In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD button more than five seconds to force the disc to eject DVD Radio Error Messages Player Error This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when the amp or DVD CD AUX button is pressed on the radio Using the Auxiliary Input Jack Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack You can however connect an external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD player or cassette tape player etc to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while t
186. c 00ccceseeeeeeeeees 4 1 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle _ 4 2 TOWING spenceri een EA 4 51 Service and Appearance Care 00 5 1 SENICE Bichiensids e Mis ESANS 5 3 UCL E E E EE E ATE TET 5 5 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 5 9 Rear Axle oo cececececececececeeeeceseeeneneaeseeeseeees 5 45 Four Wheel Drive oo eee cece cc cecea ea eeeeeeeeees 5 46 Front Axle oo ecececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseeees 5 47 Bulb Replacement cece cece ceceeceeeeeeeeees 5 48 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 54 TINGS apana A EEE E EEA 5 55 Appearance Care on ceeeeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeneenees 5 100 Vehicle Identification oe cece eeeeeee eee 5 109 Electrical System oo eee ec cec ec ee eee ee eee eee eee 5 110 Capacities and Specifications 5 117 Maintenance Schedule c0 ccsscesseesseeeseeeees 6 1 Maintenance Schedule cecceeeeeeneeeeeees 6 2 Customer Assistance Information 7 1 Customer Assistance and Information _ 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects eee 7 14 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy _ 7 16 Tate eee ee a a e eee 1 HUMMER GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem HUMMER the name HUMMER H2 and the H2 Design are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes
187. can leave your vehicle with the key your vehicle is in PARK P Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you have moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pressing the button on the console shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK P 2 44 Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P on page 2 41 When you are ready to drive move the shif
188. cants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by warranty 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain your vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You might drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You might use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you might drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You might need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and ca
189. ce II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 00 7 2 Online Owner Center cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users nnn 7 4 Customer Assistance Offices ceeeeeeeneee 7 5 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 6 Roadside Assistance Program eeeeeeee ees 7 6 Scheduling Service Appointments 00 7 Courtesy Transportation ccceseeeeeeeneeeeeneees 7 9 Collision Damage Repair ceceeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 10 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 00 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Service Publications Ordering Information Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Event Data Recorders OnStar Navigation System Radio Frequency Identification RFID Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to HUMMER Normally any concerns with the sales t
190. ch the proper level What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 45 Four Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant Transfer Case It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 A Filler Plug B Drain Plug 1 Remove the filler plug A The fluid level should be just below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 2 Add fluid if necessary Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 3 Reinstall the filler plug Use care not to overtighten the filler plug 5 46 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface When the differential is cold the proper level is from about 1 4 inch 6 mm to abo
191. cle Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That is the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer 4 55 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other
192. conds To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the bottom edge of the lever located above the parking brake pedal with the parking brake symbol to release the parking brake If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light will go off Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 Shifting Into PARK P A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 40 for more information 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P by pressing the button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you
193. cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always use the proper fluid Notice Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid Your vehicle has a message that comes on when the washer fluid is low The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle if the fluid is low When the CHECK WASHER FLUID message is displayed you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full
194. correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check the brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Checking Brake Fluid The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir A CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work well This could c
195. crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7 16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7 16 e Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service 1 71 Airbag Off Switch This switch should only be turned to the off position if the person in the right front passenger s position is Your vehicle has an airbag on off switch located in the a member of a passenger risk group identified by the glove box that you can use to manually turn on or national government as follows off the right front passenger s airbag Your switch may Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because My vehicle has no rear seat e My vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing infant seat or e The infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition Child age 1 to 12 A child age 7 to 12 must ride in the front seat because e My vehicle has no rear seat s e Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear United States Canada seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat s of my vehicle or
196. d across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guide Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the side of the seat Make sure you remove the comfort guide from the safety belt before you fold a rear seat down 1 34 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal inju
197. d to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you will need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds e You approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles e You have less time to react e You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles e You will need more distance for braking especially since you are on an unpaved surface A CAUTION When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you are driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer
198. d your mind on the drive avoid engaging in extended searching while driving Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe driving See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Here are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction while driving 3 72 While your vehicle is parked e Familiarize yourself with all of its controls e Familiarize yourself with its operation e Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them Notice Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle such as an audio system CD player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer retailer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units If sound equipment can be added it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 for more information Se
199. de press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays 3 98 Using an MP3 Radio with CD and DVD Player MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio CDA and ignores the MP3 WMA files on the DVD deck On the CD deck press the CAT category button to toggle between compressed and uncompressed audio format the default being the uncompressed format CDA MP3 WMA Format If you burn your own MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer e Make sure the MP3 WMA files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc e Do not mix standard audio and MP3 WMA files on one disc e The CD player lower slot is able to read and play a maximum combination of 512 files and folders The DVD player uppe
200. der the rear seat Be careful not to pinch the seat cables or electrical harnesses 9 Reinstall the strap to the seat rail 10 Return the seat to the correct position 5 96 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools SUV Storing the Flat or Spare Tire Use the following art and text to help store the spare or flat tire back into its proper location when done changing a tire To store the flat or spare tire on the tire carrier 1 Close the tire carrier See Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier on page 2 16 for tire carrier operation 2 Place the flat or spare tire onto the tire carrier with the outside of the wheel facing out 3 Reinstall the three nuts holding the spare or the flat tire to the tire carrier Tighten the nuts by hand 4 Use the wheel wrench and wheel wrench extension to tighten the nuts firmly 5 Try to move the tire back and forth slightly to make sure it is secure 6 Slide the license plate holder onto the spare or flat tire Secure it from the back of the tire carrier with the wing nut If you choose not to reinstall the spare or flat tire on the vehicle you still need to reinstall the license plate holder on the spare tire carrier 5 97 Storing the Jack and Tools To store the jack and tools 1 Lower the jack completely 2 Place the jack in the mounting bracket 3 Turn the hole at the top of the jack clockwise until the jack is held tight in the mounting bracket 4 Push and pu
201. displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the MENU button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out Radio s MP3 AM 640 9 389 80 J 750 96 11 98 5 xe AA Pew mew Pe Pete pep t Te w vow PefPefefepetepal 0S pg rrr LO Rs H Di lt a DVD CD bl joo ae ee a Pe fed TN A Radio with CD and DVD Radio with Six Disc CD Your vehicle has one of these radios for its audio system 3 75 Radios with CD and DVD Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose Surround Sound System Some of its features are explained later in this section under Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system it has a CD DVD radio See Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 for more information on the vehicle s RSE system The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 3 76 Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific in
202. dwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade
203. e See Engine Oil on page 5 13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information CHECK TIRE PRESSURE This message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires needs to be checked This message also displays LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 5 55 Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons earlier in this section If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 41 DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning TURNED OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating tempera
204. e 4 44 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 64 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 117 A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools SUT on page 5 94 or Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools SUV on page 5 96 When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators 5 69 You need new tires if any of the following statements are true
205. e RSA unit See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 114 for more information The DVD CD decks upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW and MP3s When a CD is inserted the text label DVD or CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner Care of Your CDs and DVDs If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R or CD RW quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R or CD RW has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD R s or CD RW s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD or DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from
206. e The child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition vary slightly 1 72 Medical Condition A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician e Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger and e Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger even if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash A CAUTION If the right front passenger s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag Ina crash the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Do not turn off the passenger s airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group Canada United States To turn off the right front passenger s airbag insert your ignition key into the switch push in and move the switch to the off position The word OFF or the off symbol will come on in the passenger airbag status indicator located in the overhead console to let you know that the right front passenger s airbag is off after the system check is completed The airbag off light will come on and stay on to
207. e airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim overhead console front sensors side impact sensors rollover sensor module or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Sa
208. e cable A to remove the pin from the latch nut C A CAUTION If you drive with the spare tire carrier unlatched you could injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle Make sure the carrier is secure before driving Opening the Tailgate SUT Model Spare Tire Carrier shown SUV Model similar Lift the release handle while pulling the tailgate 3 Swing the spare tire carrier to the side toward you Closing the Spare Tire Carrier To close the spare tire carrier do the following 1 On SUT models swing the tailgate up until it latches firmly into place A CAUTION The spare tire carrier must be secured so that it does not strike and injure someone Always close it into the latch forcefully Make sure that the release handle is fully closed down and that the cable is attached 2 Move the spare tire carrier back into place until it latches by closing it into the latch forcefully The spare tire carrier is latched properly when the latch handle has lowered to the closed position Reinstall the cable A by pushing in the button on the pin B and inserting the pin into the latch bolt nut C Pull on the spare tire carrier to make sure it is firmly latched Windows Z CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even deat
209. e garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by e Extreme dusty conditions e Sand and salt e Heat and sun e Snow and ice without proper removal 5 105 Aluminum Wheels Notice If you use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels you could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft cle
210. e hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills e Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill There are some things you should do if the vehicle to let opposing traffic know you are there stalls or is about to stall and you cannot make it up the hill e Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake e If your engine is still running shift the transmission Z CAUTION to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed e If your engine has stopped running you will need to can cause an accident There could be a restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in e Use your headlamps even during the day They make your vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert REVERSE R e As you are backing down the hill put your left hand
211. e is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on page 3 47 and Fuel on page 5 5 for more information HOOD OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the hood for obstructions and close the hood again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 3 58 LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 13 for more information
212. e the shift lever in PARK P 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then move the shift lever back to PARK P 4 Allow the engine to idle 500 800 rpm for at least one minute Slowly release the brake pedal 5 Keep the engine running and press the Trip Fuel button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP Transmission Temperature displays on the Driver Information Center DIC 5 21 6 Using the TRANS TEMP reading determine and perform the appropriate check procedure If the TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required temperature ranges allow the vehicle to cool or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached Cold Check Procedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid level Perform the hot check procedure at the first opportunity Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is between 80 F and 90 F 27 C and 32 C 1 Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle tt 2 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel The dipstick ha
213. e to low brake fluid See Brakes on page 5 36 for more information Dd United States Canada This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem A CAUTION Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 51 Antilock Brake System Warning Light That is normal If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off if the light comes on when you are driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light still stays on or comes on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have antilock brakes If the regul
214. e to zero The kit includes a first aid kit a flashlight a tire pressure gage and a multi purpose tool set 4 42 Front Mounted Receiver I I os yy A 2 a 7 35 4 4 7 t2 L sas 100500050550580 KU KKNI N Your vehicle is equipped with a front mounted receiver You can use the receiver with a power winch platform described later in this section or with other accessories Never use the front mounted receiver to tow a trailer You can use the front mounted receiver to tow your vehicle behind another See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4 51 Power Winch Platform You can use the power winch platform if equipped with an aftermarket winch Connect the winch to the platform and wiring to the vehicle following the winch manufacturer s guidelines Notice Do not use the winch platform to winch at a tension of more than 9 000 Ibs 4 082 kg This would damage your vehicle s frame This damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty If you are using a winch to pull out another vehicle follow the winch manufacturer s guidelines and observe the following to prevent damage to your vehicle e If possible have your vehicle anchored from the opposite side of the winch to a solid immovable object If winching from the front use both of the rear recovery loops If winching from the rear use both of the front recovery loops e Put your transmission in NEUTRAL N e Us
215. e will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 5 107 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Description Polishing Cloth Tar and Road Oil Remover Chrome Cleaner and Polish White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Vinyl Cleaner Glass Cleaner Chrome Wheel Cleaner Finish Enhancer 5 108 C Description Usage Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light surface contamination Removes light scratches f f Cleans shines and Ea Ne Shine protects tires No wiping necessary Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes Biodegradable and phosphate free Quickly removes spots F and stains from carpets Spot Lifter vinyl and cloth upholstery Odorless spray odor Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics vinyl leather and carpet Interior and exterior polishing cloth Removes tar road oil and asphalt Use on chrome or stainless steel Swirl Remover Polish Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls and raised white lettering Cleans vinyl Removes dirt grime smoke and fingerprints Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on and wipe off Wash Wax Concentrate Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This is the legal identi
216. e your regular brakes to hold your vehicle in place and block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving 4 43 Notice Using a power winch with the transmission in gear to pull out another vehicle may damage the transmission When operating a power winch always leave the transmission in NEUTRAL N Notice Driving your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the winch installed can cause damage to your vehicle and the car wash Always remove the winch from your vehicle before using an automatic car wash See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 103 for more information If you are using a winch to pull out your own vehicle follow the winch manufacturer s guidelines for self recovery and observe the following to prevent damage to your vehicle e Do not self recover your vehicle by wrapping the winch cable around an object such as a pulley block or tree and attaching it back to your vehicle s recovery loops e Always attach the winch cable directly to a solid anchor directly in front of your vehicle to achieve a straight line pull 4 44 Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label A CAUTION Do
217. ea Floor Drains later in this section for more information Removal and Cleaning To ensure that the water management system performs properly be sure that the midgate tailgate and cover system are fully closed and that each element of the water management system is clean and not blocked with debris Follow the instruction given next in this section for the proper procedures on cleaning each item of the water management system 2 66 Side Rail Channels The side rail channels are located on top of both sides of the roof and the cargo area You may want to flush them out with clean water if you notice any debris collecting inside of them When loading cargo into the cargo area be careful not to damage the rails For more information on this feature see Luggage Carrier on page 2 65 Cargo Area Floor Drains The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains You can flush the drains through the cutouts but if the cargo area is extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the cargo floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush the drains with water The drain grates can be removed to clear any debris that has accumulated in the drain Sunroof The vehicle may have a power sliding sunroof The ignition must be on or in the accessory position or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active Your vehicle also has four cargo area floor drains A located under the cargo mat if it has this feature See Retained Accessory
218. eakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console To use the video screen do the following 1 Push the release button located on the overhead console 2 Move the screen to the desired position When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen remains on This is normal and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers for the remote control They are located at the rear of the console Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight could also affect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD i
219. ear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages If your vehicle has electric cooling fans you may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving The fans may turn off if no cooling is required Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures or if you are operating your air conditioning system the fans may change to high speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required 5 33 Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location AIDAAN AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 5 34 How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
220. east once a year d Inspect wiper blades for wear cracking or contamination Clean the windshield and wiper blades if contaminated Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 54 and Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades on page 5 105 for more information e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1 76 f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer liftgate handle pivot points rear door detent link roller mechanism liftgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge cargo door hinge locks and folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Spare tire carrier hinge and latch Inspect for leaks and lubricate if required Remove the setscrew at the hinge casting and add lubricant moving the hinge back and forth periodically until lubricant can be seen coming from the setscrew opening Install
221. eatures were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The customization preferences are automatically recalled To change customization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in PARK P To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press the customization button to scroll through the available customizable options 3 63 Feature Settings Menu Items The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the customization button until the PRESS TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to display all DIC messages in English 3 64 DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS All messa
222. ecseterecidenntars 3 19 Event Data Recorders ccececececeeeeeeeeeees 7 16 Extender Safety Belt ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 35 EXtenOr Lamps sgsr asitin ini iadnn 3 15 Filter Engine Air Cleaner ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 18 Finish Damage ioio anaa a E i 5 107 First Aid Kibir oiriiss nnii inah 4 42 Fixed Mast Antenna cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeenes 3 118 Flashers Hazard Warning 0ceceeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 FlaSh to PaSS cccccceceee eee eeteeeeeeeeeeeenseeneneees 3 9 Flat MPG ici ccea tare ctitaa eE nian donsaieancueeaa te saat 5 78 Flat Tire Changing ececeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee 5 78 Flat Tire Storing oesi eranen 5 94 5 96 PIG ernennen E n E E A 5 21 Power Steering cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee een een ees 5 34 Windshield Washer cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 35 Folding Rear Seat cceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeaeeaes 1 8 Four Wheel Drive ccceceec cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 46 Four Wheel Drive Full Time c ceeeeeee 2 36 Front Axle 2 0 00 cece cece cece ee eeeeeeeeteneteteneeaenaeenes 5 47 Front Mounted Receiver cecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 43 PUG state ecitede A EEE AEE AAEE 5 5 Additives oscsiicniiiinniianene innir 5 6 C lifornia Fuel o cccvsecseccivericcsewevdd eee 5 5 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 0 5 9 Filling the TANK sicsecinchedscecdsedaeeaes innnan 5 7 Fuels in
223. ect Press and release this button to eject the disc that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject dJ Tune Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing Ki SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds on the CD have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track For Radios with CD and DVD Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than five seconds on the CD have played If less than five seconds on the CD have played the previous track plays Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this REV button to reverse playback quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays D gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track di
224. ectly If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player resumes playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD Recommended Action The auxiliary source is Check that the RSE video running but there is no screen is in the auxiliary picture or sound source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions headphone audio cuts out low batteries reception or buzzes range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L left and R right on the headphones lost the remote and or See your dealer retailer the headphones for assistance The DVD is playing but Check that the RSE video there is no picture or screen is sourced to the sound DVD player DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on the radio that is in the vehicle The video screen can display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if
225. ed inflation pressure so you can finish your trip Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way a spare tire will be available in case you need it again Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they will not fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together 5 99 Appearance Care Interior Cleaning Your vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from your upholstery It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible Your vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle s interior When cleaning your vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended 5 100 Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent ov
226. ed Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of used oil ask your dealer retailer a service station or a local recycling center for help Engine Air Cleaner Filter Notice If you spray water into the engine air cleaner filter intake and water enters the engine air cleaner filter housing as shown in the illustration you could damage your vehicle s engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not spray water into the engine air cleaner filter intake and or housing See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter and the air filter restriction indicator if equipped When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter If your vehicle is equipped with an air fil
227. ed to hold only one child restraint Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per anchor A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Secure any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Be sure to follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer Notice Contact between the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly may cause damage to these parts Make sure when securing unused safety belts behind the child restraint that there is no contact between the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the seat When removing the child restraint always remember to return the safety belts to their normal stowed position before folding the rear seat 1 53 Second Row Center Position SUT 1 4 Route and attach but do not tighten
228. ed to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Gage United States Canada The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure zone the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE message will appear in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 and Engine Oil on page 5 13 for more information A reading in the low pressure zone
229. edge of the instrument panel EAREN AUX PWR2 Floor Console Power Outlets SWC BKLT Steering Wheel Controls Backlight IDDM Driver Door Module Stoplamps Center High Mounted STOP LAMPS Stoplamp REAR HVAC Rear Climate Controls Body Control Module cTsy md T 7 PDM Te cml E estore poeg SroP LAMPS pemg Auxewn EuP pj INFO Ta REAR WPR ceng os co REAR Hae L 5 111 Fuses Us Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block AUX PWR Rear Cargo Accessory Power The center instrument panel fuse block is located Outlets underneath the instrument panel to the left of the IS LPS Interior Lamps steering column UNLCK1 Power Door Lock 1 Unlock Feature Top View INFO Infotainment System Remote Keyless Entry System HEADLINER UGDO Universal Home Remote System eo LCK1 Power Door Lock 1 Lock Feature EADONER ONSTAR Driver Seat Module Harness Connector LT DR Driver Door Harness Connection UPFITTER BODY BODY 5 112 commector Vse Connector Special Equipment Option Upfitter Passenger Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker Driver Seat Circuit Breaker Rear Sliding Window Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment is located on the driver side of the vehicle near the battery Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components on your vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any elec
230. ee Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 for more on this including important safety information If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the airbag on off switch See your dealer retailer for service Charging System Light This light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system A charging system Driver Information Center DIC message may also appear See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information This light could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running but the ignition is on this gage shows the battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system The charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery for improved fuel economy and battery life The gage may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading this is normal
231. ee Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 for more on this including important safety information To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way 1 63 Airbag System Your vehicle has the following airbags e A frontal airbag for the driver e A frontal airbag for the right front passenger e A roof rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver e A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger Your vehicle may have the following airbags e If your vehicle has a third row seat it will have third row roof rail airbags All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim 1 64 Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
232. ees 3 116 Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem 3 54 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 0 0008 3 116 DIC Warnings and Messages 06cceeeeeeees 3 56 ih oe eagles Mune datetngetenercugeeers nce essmt a DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons 3 63 Ixe as MENNA sasncieitcrcet cred oarciarcien nani XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 118 Audio System s ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 72 Setting the Clock cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 73 Radio s MP3 ccciecaccssectsneancnies aaarnas 3 75 4 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview 3 4 The main components of the instrument panel are the following A B m I0 Air Outlets See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 29 Midgate Window Switch SUT See Power Windows on page 2 20 Rear Wiper Washer Switch SUV See Rear Window Wiper Washer on page 3 11 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 7 Instrument Panel Cluster See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 32 Audio Steering Wheel Buttons See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 116 Driver Information Center DIC Buttons See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 49 Analog Clock Analog Clock on page 3 21 Airbag Switch See Airbag Off Switch on page
233. ehicle down from the log with your brake 4 22 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how well built the vehicle A CAUTION Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make
234. ehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to ON RUN to drive the vehicle If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done To manually shut off a remote start e Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Turn the ignition switch on and then off The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences The engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start Or you can extend the engine run time by another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame and before the engine stops For example if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes The additional ten minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start Once two remote starts or a single remote start with one time extension has been done the vehicle must be started with the key After the key is removed from the ignition the vehicle can be remote started again The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition the hood is not closed or if there is an emission control system malfunction Also the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets
235. ehicles with memory recall seats the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2 A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK OFF Blank Display This display shows no information 3 54 DIC Operation and Displays Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off or acknowledge DIC messages You can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays odometer engine hours trip odometer and display language Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Engine Hours To display the ENGINE HOURS place the ignition in LOCK OFF or ACC ACCESSORY then press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while viewing the ODOMETER This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run Trip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in
236. either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of miles mi or kilometers km driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 5 miles 8 km before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 5 miles 8 km As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles 8 4 km etc Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear To select a language 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays While in the ODOMETER display press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays Continue to press and hold the tr
237. els and is used for extreme off road conditions Choose Four Wheel Low Lock while driving off road in deep sand mud or snow and climbing or descending steep hills When in this mode you can also choose to lock the rear axle for additional traction in extreme off road situations See Locking Rear Axle on page 4 6 Notice Operating your vehicle in Four Wheel Low Lock above 50 mph 80 km h for any extended period of time could cause damage to the transfer case Do not operate your vehicle in Four Wheel Low Lock above 50 mph 80 km h for extended periods A CAUTION Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake on page 2 40 N NEUTRAL Shift the vehicle s transfer case to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4 51 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 51 for more information Indicator lights in the dial shows which mode you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on take your vehicle to your dealer retailer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case It will remain on when the shift is complete If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested sh
238. em does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 34 for more information Notice lf an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 70 See your dealer retailer for service Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If you have had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have your safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system if eq
239. embly aligning the splines on the bulb socket with the splines in the headlamp housing Do not to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands 7 Turn the bulb socket retainer clockwise to lock it into place 8 Plug in the electrical connector 4 Pull the bulb from the bulb socket 5 Install the new bulb into the bulb socket 6 Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn it clockwise until it locks 5 49 Daytime Running Lamps DRL To replace a daytime running lamp bulb 1 Locate the lamp assembly behind the front bumper through the wheel opening 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp housing 3 Remove the bulb from the bulb socket 4 Install the new bulb into the bulb socket 5 Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn it clockwise until it locks 5 50 Roof Marker Lamps Corner Roof Marker Lamps To replace one of these bulbs Remove the screw and lift off the lens Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it Remove the bulb Install a new bulb into the socket Reinstall the socket into the lens and turn it clockwise to lock it into place Hook the side of the lens with the hook end into the notch first and then tighten the screw Center Roof Marker Lamps Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps To replace one of these bulbs and Back up Lamps 1 Push in on the notch with a flat tool and pull
240. ements California 5 4 Power Door LOCKS rotera Ena e EA 2 11 Electrical System sncirsscnrssriernersnsnireraresss 5 110 Lumbar Controls 0cceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 1 3 Reclining Seatbacks c cceeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 1 5 Retained Accessory RAP ccecce 2 29 OAL chee te cens cs tat sat euleteetete tsa ce aie e 1 2 Steering Fluid vevcc ce ccsess cacdeedieecuetsenciteceecmetens 5 34 WINDOWS icsectactSnscenc cat grad a EEA 2 20 Power Winch Platform ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 43 PIINAGCY i enaena a a eai 7 16 Event Data Recorders ceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 16 Navigation System ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 7 17 ONnStah cscccswersciseneeadsia teyeasaovewecaaeaeeeduass ceosids 7 17 Radio Frequency Identification 7 17 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 R Radio Frequency Identification RFID Privacy 7 17 Radios teree eeo sereeesaauush O 3 72 Radio S secdisenssiticcwecancnnecne an aan e e E ROE 3 75 Radios Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual s c 3 104 Rear Seat Audio iiiiiseanicnnnonininiiaiaii 3 114 RRECEPUON sivenccciseccees heated eoi ea ia 3 117 Setting the Clock wive esidisceie nieces nanceceds 3 73 Theft Deterrent c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 116 Reading Lamps 2 i isetensideiiciaacienedgierstieckess 3 19 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls
241. en this happens the system applies the brakes to limit wheel spin and also reduces engine power You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal TCS may operate on dry roads under some conditions When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration or a pumping sound This is normal and does not mean there s a problem with your vehicle Examples of these conditions include hard acceleration in a turn an abrupt upshift or downshift of the transmission or driving on rough roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 3 12 If your vehicle has a Driver information Center DIC a SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message will appear when a Traction Control System or Antilock Brake System problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 When this message is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to To turn the system off press the TCS button for five seconds This light will c
242. ended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus processing fee Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags ina crash and if so equipped to pro
243. er a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 8 choosing a different button in Step 6 than what you used for the garage door opener Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating the instructions Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons You should erase the programmed buttons when you sell or terminate your lease To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights located directly above the buttons begin to blink rapidly 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release both buttons The codes from all buttons will be erased For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 5 2 63 Storage Areas Glove Box To open the glove box lift up on the lever Cupholder s Your vehicle has cupholders located in front of the center console in the rear center armrest and in the rear of the vehicle on the left side 2 64 Center Console Storage Your vehicle has a center console located between the front seats To open press the bu
244. er some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with
245. er spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in your vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning your vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Your dealer retailer has a product for cleaning your vehicle s glass Should it become necessary you can also obtain a product from your dealer retailer to remove odors from your vehicle s upholstery Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners or techniques e Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface e Never use a stiff brush It can cause damage to your vehicle s interior surfaces e Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal e Use only mild neutral pH soaps Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers Using too much soap will leave a residue th
246. er will know the kind of wheel you need 5 74 Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS sensors for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 for more information Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel Tire Chains Notice Use tire chains only wh
247. ere legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class U type chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle 5 75 Accessory Inflator Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator system You can inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires You can also use it to bring your tire pressure up to the proper pressure The engine must be running and the gearshift lever must be in PARK P for the inflator to operate The accessory inflator is located in the rear compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle 5 76 The accessory inflator kit includes a hose and three nozzle adapters To use the accessory inflator do the following 1 Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of the hose 2 Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish to inflate 3 Remove the dust cover and attach the hose to the outlet The accessory inflator hose also has a built in air pressure gage As soon as you start to inflate an object it will automatically read the current pressure 4 Press and release the switch to turn the accesso
248. erform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 75 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals 5 3 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work A CAUTION You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If you want to do some of your own service work you should use the proper service manua
249. ers or cargo in your vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow If you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to a maximum of 600 Ibs 272 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to a maximum of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg with a weight distributing hitch Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle 4 59 Your spare tire carrier is behind the tailgate If your hitch extension is too short the spare tire may interfere with trailer coupling or trailer tongue jack operation on some types of trailers After you have loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle s ability to c
250. ess the RES button on the steering wheel The vehicle will return to the previously set speed and stay there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached then release it e To increase vehicle speed in small increments press the RES button Each time this is done the vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce the vehicle s speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached then release it e To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button on the steering wheel briefly Each time this is done the vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle s speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise speed Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle s speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed When going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle s speed down When
251. ess this knob to turn the radio on or off Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume Press and hold this knob for more than two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system and to start the parental control feature Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio RSA system or remote control A lock symbol displays next to the clock display The parental control feature remains on until you press and hold this knob for more than two seconds again or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle J Tune Turn this knob to change tracks on a CD or DVD to manually tune a radio station or to change clock or date settings while in the clock or date setting mode See the information given earlier in this section specific to the radio CD and the DVD Also see Setting the Clock in the index for setting the clock and date K SEEK Previous Track Chapter Press the left SEEK arrow to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press the left SEEK arrow again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews SEEK Next Track Chapter Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews lt lt REV Reverse P
252. ether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations at Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Second Row Seats SUV at Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Second Row Seats SUT at Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Third Row Seats SUV 1 49 For SUV models there are exposed metal anchors for the second row center and passenger side seating positions For SUT models there are exposed metal anchor for the second row center seating position For SUV models the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each position in the second row Be sure to use the anchor located nearest to the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 1 50 Second Row Seats SUV For SUT models the top tether anc
253. f Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off 3 43 Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed You might notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration these conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle Your dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed 3 44 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you ne
254. f it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you need to start over The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off 3 Press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen 4 Start with the driver side front tire 5 Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off 9 Tur
255. f my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear Safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If am a good driver and never drive far from A home why should wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you are ina crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 21 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see Older Children on page 1 36 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 39 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who
256. f or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when the engine is started If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem Airbag Off Light If your vehicle has an airbag on off switch it also has a passenger airbag status indicator located in the instrument panel PASSENGER AIRBAG United States Canada When you start your vehicle the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will light for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol will light to let you know the status of the right front passenger s frontal airbag When you turn the right front passenger s airbag off this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the airbag has been turned off This light will go off when you turn the airbag back on again See Airbag Off Switch on page 1 72 for more on this including important safety information United States Canada 3 35 When you manually turn the right front passenger s airbag off using the airbag on off switch in the glove box the indicator light OFF or the off symbol will come on and stay on to remind you that the airbag has been turned off This light will go off when you turn
257. far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See Battery Replacement later in this section e If you are still having trouble see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions will work up to 195 feet 60 m away However the operating range may be less while the vehicle is running therefore you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to start it There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 Q Remote Vehicle Start Press Q to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 8 for additional information Lock Press to lock all the doors If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the turn signal lamps will flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn will chirp when is pressed again within three seconds of the previous press of the lock button See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 for additional in
258. fier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps you identify your vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 117 for your vehicle s engine code Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts The label has the following information e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Model designation e Paint information e Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle 5 109 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage would not be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain your vehicle s battery even if your vehicle is not operating Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servici
259. for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless you are in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times 2 56 Location information about your vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available Your vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service to you at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of your vehicle in an accident hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion Your Responsibility Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar advisor If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red this means that your system is not functioning properly and should be checked by your dealer retailer If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired You can always press the OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment is active Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held r
260. formation Pressing will arm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 24 m Unlock Press m to unlock the driver s door If m is pressed again within three seconds all remaining doors will unlock If it is dark enough outside your interior lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the turn signal lamps will flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 lf enabled through the DIC the exterior lights will turn on briefly if it is dark enough outside See APPROACH LIGHTING under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 Pressing m on the RKE transmitter will disarm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 24 You can lower the windows by pressing and holding m on the RKE transmitter See Power Windows on page 2 20 for additional information If you use the RKE transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is on automatic seat and adjustable mirror movements may occur To use this feature again you must first perform a recall to the other memorized position or use the easy exit feature See MEMORY SEAT RECALL under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 for additional information amp Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release 2 to locate your
261. formation from these stations and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters displays In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound During your trial or when you subscribe you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in your vehicle A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and www xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 in Canada Playing the Radio D Power Volume Press this knob to turn the system on and off Turn this volume knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume Speed Compensated Volume SCV Radio with Six Disc CD Player Radios with Speed Compensated Volume SCV automatically adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down The volume level should be consistent while you drive To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2
262. ge 3 49 or DIC Operation and Displays Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem on page 3 54 for more information on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 70 REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 8 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the custom
263. ges will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC You can also change the language by pressing the trip odometer reset stem See Language under DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons earlier in this section for more information AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 11 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK default The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK P AT VEHICLE SPEED The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors
264. get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Z CAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense fuel only into approved A CAUTION Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop containers or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Hood Release 2 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering column
265. ght The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following e Too much flexing e Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following e Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to su
266. gnal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps rdinara eave ances 5 51 Replacement Bulbs ceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 53 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 54 TIVES si2ninccendlied chiapas dah edielec dy ciachlaasmiaamhind 5 55 Tire Sidewall Labeling ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 56 Tire Terminology and Definitions 04 5 58 Section 5 Inflation Tire PreSSUre e eeeeeeereeeee eee 5 61 Tire Pressure Monitor System eeeeeeeeee 5 62 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 00008 5 64 Tire Inspection and Rotation eee 5 67 When It Is Time for New Tires ccce 5 69 Buying New Tires 00 2 0 c cceeeeeeeecet ee este nicati 5 70 Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 0006 5 72 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeeeees 5 72 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 74 Wheel Replacement 0 ceeceeeeeeeeeeerenees 5 74 Tite ChainS cis iiuair enee A ENEE EA 5 75 Accessory Inflator 0 cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 5 76 If a Tire Goes Flat ce ceceeeeeee eee eeeeee eee ees 5 78 Changing a Flat Tire pensinio rniii 5 78 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools SUT 5 80 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools SUV 5 84 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire ccc ccecccee eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 88 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools SUT 5 94 Storing a Flat or
267. h from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 2 19 Power Windows A power window switch is located on the armrest of each side door The switches operate while the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY or while Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory The driver s door also has a switch for each of the passenger s windows Press the front of the switch to the first position to lower the window to the desired level Pull up the front of the switch to raise the window 2 20 Power RAP on page 2 29 Express Down Windows The window switches have an express down feature which allows the window to be lowered fully without continuously pressing the switch Press the front of the window switch down all the way and release Express down can be interrupted at any time by pulling up the front of the switch Window Lockout This feature prevents the rear passengers from operating their windows max Window Lockout This button is located near the power window switches on the driver s door A light in the lockout button will come on to show that lockout has been activated Press the button again to return to normal operation Global Window Feature The global window up and express down button is located on the instrument panel A SZ This feature allows all side windows a
268. h number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to start the vehicle there may be a problem with your theft deterrent system Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 110 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service lf your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the PASS Key Ill to have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance It is possible for the PASS Key Ill decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have keys made and programmed to the system See your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system To program the new additional key 1 Verify that the new key has a stamped on it 2 Insert the original already programmed key in the ignition and sta
269. h you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something does not stop In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel 1 20 or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down I
270. h 2 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 72 How Does an Airbag Restrain eeee 1 70 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 75 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 8 1 70 Analog GClOCK oct eniinn eE A e E E RERS 3 21 Antenna Fixed Mast ccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 118 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna SVSISM cic enia ap eonna EE E 3 118 Antilock Brake System ABS assecc 4 4 Antilock Brake System Warning Light 3 39 Appearance Care Aluminum Wheels 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 106 Care of Safety Belts eeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 5 103 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 107 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 4 5 104 Fabric Carpet sisiiciiecsesetee nics iacsec 5 101 Finish Care sccscsesnciemtaneradaned dnaceedteeecce swtees 5 104 FiniSh Damage Aerosensa ai 5 107 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces ws 0 ccsciaeee stew ceeaneeece 5 102 Interior Cleaning rsrsrs einierde 5 100 Leather siran eion e ii On 5 102 Sheet Metal Damage eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 106 Speaker Covers ccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 103 TOS acceind Sbsncapdadamendanaamenmcawes caress ane perea tens 5 106 Underbody Maintenance eeeeeeee 5 107 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 108 Washing Your Vehicle cseeeeeeeee eee eee ee 5 103 Weathersitips cciscsiscetsce
271. h or Four Wheel High Lock ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine running If the Four Wheel High or Four Wheel High Lock position is selected when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel High or Four Wheel High Lock indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 5 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the indicator light stops flashing could cause damage to the transfer case Always wait until the indicator light stops flashing before putting the transmission back in gear Shifting into NEUTRAL To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll 2 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal See Parking Brake on page 2 40 Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON RUN Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N Shift the transfer case to Two Wheel Drive High Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to NEUTRAL position The transfer case will not shift to NEUTRAL unless this position is held for 10 seconds The NEUTRAL light will come on and then the dial can be slowly released The dial will be in the Four Wheel Low Lock position but the transfer case will be in NEUTRAL with the NEUTRAL light on 7 If the engine is running make sure that the transfer case is in NEUTRAL N by shifting the transmission to REVE
272. hat the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap 7 AIIN SAE 5W 30 AR Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT c LOOK FOR i THIS SYMBOL FORA 20 AND GM GASOLINER STANDARD SQENGINESS cS ATIES GM6094M 60 40 20 DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER Look for three things e GM6094M Your vehicle s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M e SAE 5W 30 As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 e Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Look for this information on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container
273. he RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC DELAY DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors and liftgate will be delayed When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a door or the liftgate is open this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch or the RKE transmitter a second time See Delayed Locking on page 2 11 for more information Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed NO CHANGE No change will be made
274. he XM Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed Section 4 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 2 Defensive Driving cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Drunk DIVINO essene a eese aaa E ARE 4 2 Control of a Vehicle ssisesssisssncorsrcsnaries neess 4 3 Braking zeiss eer eaan E E OEN 4 3 Antilock Brake System ABS i e 4 4 Braking in Emergencies ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee 4 5 Traction Control System TCS o ae 4 5 Locking Rear Axle 0 c eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 StabiliTrak System cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 7 Ste ering cccce cece ee cece Era eR 4 9 Off Road Recovery ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeneenes 4 11 PASSING eeri a a EE EEE sian 4 12 Loss Of GOntrolls iredi nen aane ea 4 12 Off Road Driving vcs sisssneseseasceieeeecue teehee 4 13 ASSISt StepSmigan oeenn an eee esaeeaeea teas 4 32 Driving zat NIGHT was sctescciceccesh ed ma pecaicanien ioes 4 32 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 33 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 0 ee 4 34 Highway Hypnosis cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 4 34 Driving Your Vehicle Hill and Mountain Roads eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 35 Winter Driving siccctiveciectss ciseciecndteneimedinves saas 4 36 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud lce OF SNOW ciccccc esses wcnccccnetetehiveeekenettenasncnd 4 39 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 4 40 Recovery LOOP
275. he battery in the RKE transmitter 1 Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat thin object inserted into the notch on the side 2 Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object 3 Insert the new battery positive side facing down Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery 4 Put the transmitter back together tightly Remote Vehicle Start The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle It may also start up the vehicle s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON RUN position During a remote start the climate control system will default to a heating mode during colder outside temperatures and a cooling mode during warmer outside temperatures During a remote start the rear window defogger and heated mirrors if equipped will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to ON RUN During a remote start the heated seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to ON RUN See Heated Seats on page 1 4 for additional information Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not
276. he last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless you have chosen the folder mode as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension Such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename displays 3 100 Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 WMaA In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD R or CD RW partway into either the top or bottom slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing Depending on the format of the disc a softkey menu appears and allows navigation of the disc The menu reads left to right as RDM Randomize song play order a Folder icon with left and right arrows to move up or down through available folders a PL tag if the disc has a Pl
277. he memory seat feature at any time press one of the memory buttons or power seat controls Easy Exit Seat To store the seat exit position 1 Press and release the button 1 The seat will move to the stored memory position 2 Adjust the seat to the desired exit position 3 Press and hold the exit button until a double chime sounds to let you know that the position has been stored A second seat exit position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2 0 Easy Exit Seat To use the seat exit position e Press the exit button on the memory control e If this feature is activated in the DIC removing the key from the ignition will move the seat to the exit position See Easy Exit Seat under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 for more information on activating this feature in the DIC Power Reclining Seatbacks The front seats have power reclining seatbacks The control used to operate the seatbacks are located on the outboard side of the seats e To recline the seatback press the control toward the rear of the vehicle e To raise the seatback press the control toward the front of the vehicle CAUTION Continued The shoulder belt cannot do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your
278. he vehicle is in PARK P See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5 mm 1 8 inch cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is connected press the radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers For optimal sound quality increase the portable audio device s volume to the loudest level It is always best to power your portable audio device through its own battery while playing Q Power Volume Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player Additional volume adjustments might have to be made from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device continues playing so you might want to stop it or turn it off CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when a portable audio device is playing Press this button again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays DVD CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press
279. herstrip Lubricant Hood Hinges GM Part No U S 12346241 GM Part No U S 3634770 in Canada 10953474 Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518 or Outer Tailgate Multi Purpose lubricant a Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease Handle Pivot GM Part No U S 1234 GM Part No U S 12345579 Points Canada 10953474 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease Spare Tire GM PartNo Us esoeeiae Weatherstrip with Teflon Superlube Carrier Hinge in Canada 890221801 meeting Squeaks GM Part No U S 12371287 GM Specification 9986139 in Canada 10953437 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube copate lire GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Parte art Number ACD Part Number Wiper Blades Front 17 0 inches 43 0 cm 15060730 Po OS Rear 11 0 inches 28 0 cm 12335785 ee Engine Drive Belt Routing 6 15 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 8 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or Reading Serviced By Maintenan
280. hich you cannot see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Parking Over Things That Burn e The exhaust system sounds strange or different Z CAUTION Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK P consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Repairs were not done correctly Your vehicle or the exhaust system has been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and e Have your vehicle fixed immediately 2 43 Running the Engine While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know A CAUTION Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 2 43 Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO
281. hicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 8 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 9 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 10 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 5 91 A CAUTION Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts Because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash 11 Install the spare tire 12 Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel 13 Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts by turning it clockwise until the wheel is held against the hub
282. hift the transfer case to NEUTRAL 5 Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL N See Full Time Four Wheel Drive on page 2 36 for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your vehicle 4 52 6 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle You can use your vehicle s front mounted receiver with the proper accessories to tow it See Front Mounted Receiver under f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 39 7 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY 8 Disconnect the battery if you are going to tow for long distances or long periods of time When towing your vehicle for extended periods of time start your vehicle as often as possible to prevent battery drain This should only be done when the tow vehicle is parked Dolly Towing Your vehicle cannot be dolly towed If you must tow your vehicle behind another use the dinghy towing procedure listed previously Notice Dolly towing your vehicle will damage drivetrain components Do not dolly tow your vehicle Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height If your vehicle has this feature it comes as part of the electronically controlled air suspension system The selectable rear ride height allows you to raise the rear of the vehicle about 2 inches 5 cm over the normal ride height This can be helpful when driving off road where you may need more ground clearance to clear an obstacle The bu
283. hing gets caught between the glass panel and roof frame while the sunroof is closing the glass panel will stop and open half way and the deflector will raise fully If something gets caught between the glass panel and the roof frame during the tilt down operation the glass panel will stop and open fully If the sunroof panel receives a strong impact the anti pinch protection feature may work even if nothing gets caught between the glass panel and roof frame Sunshade Operation The sunshade will open automatically when opening the sunroof However it can manually be pulled shut after the sunroof is closed To adjust the sunshade push it backward or pull it forward to the desired position The sunshade cannot be adjusted further than the current closed position of the sunroof Notice If you force the sunshade forward of the sliding glass panel damage will occur and the sunroof may not open or close properly Always close the glass panel before closing the sunshade Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview seenen 3 4 Climate Controls cece cnet eee eee 3 22 Hazard Warning Flashers eeeeeeeeeeeee ee 3 6 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 22 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 3 6 Outlet Adjustment ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 29 OMe jaca E A E E ease iadetanans 3 6 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System Tilt Wheel sccegece teste eas
284. hor is located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for the center position in the second row You may need to fold the seatback of the passenger side seat forward in order to access this anchor Second Row Seats SUT For SUV models with third row seating the top tether anchor is located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for the passenger side seating position in the third row Third Row Seat SUV Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 46 for additional information 1 51 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual 1 52 A CAUTION Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the vehicle is design
285. hort periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met e The ignition is on e The exterior lamps control is in AUTO e The transmission is not in PARK P e The light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL are on only the DRL lamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps will not be on The instrument panel will not be lit up either When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps To turn off the DRL lamps turn the exterior lamps control to the OFF position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the PARK P position before the DRL lamps can be turned off 3 17 Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch is in AUTO the automatic headlamp system will turn on the headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps roof marker lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic headlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the PARK P position before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off The vehicle has a ligh
286. icasiecs cactasaneadeounpetane 5 103 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 105 Wood Panels ss isc ccastiees is E NN 5 103 Appointments Scheduling Service 7 8 ASIIPAY E E A 3 21 ASSISt SOP ai a nan E E Ieai 4 32 Audio System 1 2 ce cee ceee eect ee eee eee eee eeeeen een een ees 3 72 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 116 Fixed Mast Antenna ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 3 118 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual i e 3 104 Audio System cont Radio RECOpllOMt scazcncscanicnereratendaetoentnaneice 3 117 Rear Seat Audio RSA ceeeeeeeeeneee tenes 3 114 SEUNG The COCK sc saieadee stences E ER 3 73 Theft Deterrent Feature 2 eeeeeeeeee ees 3 116 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 118 Audio System s c ceeceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeneen ees 3 75 Automatic Headlamp System 3 18 Automatic Transmission FIWIG E E E 5 21 Operation siiis eren aeaa EE E 2 32 Battery eristianu tanei aiae e aiana aasa 5 39 Run Down Protection csceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 19 Brake Emergencies s2iciseitels heidi Agee ees 4 5 Brake S ia nienie R ARGA 5 36 System Warning Light c eeeeeeeneeeeee eee 3 38 BiAKING eisene oticadsasncacieate Detednes dentnasneacaneonnthnebies 4 3 Braking in Emergencies cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 4 5 Break In New Vehicle cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 28 Bul
287. icator lights will show the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the ignition is turned off To use the heated seat feature after restarting your vehicle press the heated seat or seatback button again Memory Seat and Mirrors If your vehicle has this feature the controls for the memory function are located on the driver s door 1 Saves the seating position for driver 1 2 Saves the seating position for driver 2 4 Programs and recalls the easy exit position These buttons are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seat and both the driver s and passenger s outside mirrors The settings for these features can be saved for up to two drivers To store the memory settings 1 While the vehicle is in PARK P adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner lumbar and side wing area and both outside mirrors to a comfortable position 2 Press and hold button 1 until a double chime sounds to let you know that the position has been stored A second seating and mirror position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2 To recall the memory positions the vehicle must be in PARK P Press and release either button 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position A single chime will sound and the memory position will be recalled To stop recall movement of t
288. ices on page 6 8 tells you what should be checked when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 When your vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message in the Driver Information Center DIC comes on it means that service is required for your vehicle See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally you must service your vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life Syste
289. icle Diagnosis and service might be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required If the Light is Flashing The following can prevent more serious damage to your vehicle e Reduce vehicle speed e Avoid hard accelerations e Avoid steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the ignition off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible If the Light Is On Steady You might be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling the Tank on page 5 7 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light of
290. ide mirror adjusts for the glare of the headlamps behind you See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display on page 2 45 Park Tilt Mirrors The vehicle s outside mirrors can also perform a park tilt function This causes the passenger s and or driver s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE R This feature may be useful in viewing the curb when parallel parking When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R and a short delay has occurred the passenger s and or driver s mirror will return to its original position To change the preselected tilt position adjust the mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in REVERSE R When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R this new position is saved in memory as the tilt position This feature can be enabled disabled through the Driver Information Center See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 for more information Outside Convex Mirror A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat It also makes things like other vehicles look farther a
291. ids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Notice It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by your warranty Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 13 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 24 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect your vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 67 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
292. ification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Usage Fluid Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil on page 5 13 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 5 24 Engine Oil Engine Coolant Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid eee Optikleen Washer Solvent Usage Fluid Lubricant GM Power Steering Fluid Power Steering GM Part No U S 89021184 y in Canada 89021186 Automatic DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Key Lock GM Part No U S 12346241 in y Canada 10953474 Chassis Lubricant Chassis GM Part No U S 12377985 in lubrication Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Specification 9986115 DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Spline Lubricant Special Lubricant Front Axle GM Part No U S 12345879 Propshaft in Canada 10953511 or Spline lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830 Front and Rear Axle Usage Fluid Lubricant Usage Fluid Lubricant Multi Purpose ae ae y Weat
293. ift it will return to the last chosen setting If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on you should take your vehicle to your dealer retailer for service See Service 4WD message under Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 49 2 37 Shifting between Four Wheel High and Four Wheel High Lock With the vehicle traveling less than 40 mph 64 km h turn the dial to the Four Wheel High or Four Wheel High Lock position The indicator light on the dial will flash while shifting It will remain on when the shift is complete It may be necessary to drive backwards for a short distance of 25 feet 7 5 m to get the lock feature to disengage Shifting into Four Wheel Low Lock To shift into Four Wheel Low Lock the ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 5 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N The preferred method for shifting into Four Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Turn the dial to the Four Wheel Low Lock position You must wait for the Four Wheel Low Lock indicator light on the dial to stop flashing and remain lit before shifting the transmission in gear 2 38 When the transfer case is shifted into Four Wheel Low Lock position a StabiliTrak indicator light will come on to show that the system has been turned off and a message will show in the DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information Notice Shifting the tra
294. ight Operation Tips e Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of the windows e Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout the vehicle e Adding outside equipment to the front of the vehicle such as hood air deflectors etc may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls If your vehicle has this rear climate control system there are rear seat audio controls located in the center console The rear system can be controlled through the AUX button on the front climate control panel Press the AUX button to turn the rear climate control system on or off An indicator light in the AUX button comes on when the rear climate control system is on The direction temperature and speed of the airflow for the rear of the vehicle will be the same as those set for the front of the vehicle Use the controls located in the rear of the front console to independently control the air flow for the rear of the vehicle separately from that of the front of the vehicle To turn the system on press any of the rear air conditioning control buttons except the button
295. il remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of your leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather 5 102 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on pla
296. ing the copyright information or the previews lt 4 Fast Reverse Press this button to quickly reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD release the fast reverse button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt gt Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release the fast forward button This button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews d Audio Press this button to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc Subtitles Press this button to turn ON OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc AUX Auxiliary Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source Camera Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature while a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection 3 111 amp Clear Press this but
297. ion When this happens try reducing the treble on your radio FM Stereo FM stereo gives the best sound but FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out 3 117 XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or through tunnels could cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent replace it Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still tightened 3 118 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception If your vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the XM system Make sure t
298. ions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle 2 26 PASS Key Ill Operation Your vehicle has PASS Key Ill Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or START from the LOCK OFF position You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system When the PASS Key Ill system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the hig
299. ip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages The available languages are ENGLISH default FRANCAIS French ESPANOL Spanish and NO CHANGE Once the desired language is displayed release the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice 3 55 DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them 3 56 CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 16 for information on how to reset the messag
300. ir conditioning is selected an indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning has been activated Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning indicator flash three times and then turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode is not available If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective the air conditioning light turns off to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so a small amount of water might drip underneath the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal Sensors The solar sensor located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel monitors the solar radiation Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly The interior temperature sensor located in the headliner above the driver side seat measures the temperature of the air inside the vehicle There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature i
301. ir suspension if equipped keeps the rear of your vehicle level under all load conditions The system maintains the vehicle at the currently selected ride height There are two ride heights Normal Ride Height and Extended Ride Height The Extended Ride Height feature is only available if the vehicle speed is below 40 mph 64 km h If the vehicle is at Extended Ride Height and the speed exceeds 40 mph 64 km h the system will automatically return the vehicle to Normal Ride Height The activation and deactivation of the Extended Ride Height feature is controlled by a switch on the instrument panel The system includes a compressor two height sensors and two air springs supporting the vehicle The system is activated when the engine is started and deactivated when the ignition is returned to OFF The engine must be running for the rear of the vehicle to be raised and the doors must be closed to enable a transition between Normal Ride Height and Extended Ride Height You may hear the compressor running whilst the system is active and you may also hear the release of air similar to a hissing sound This is normal 4 54 Load leveling will not function normally with the inflater hose attached to the inflator outlet Remove the hose from the outlet when it is not in use See Accessory Inflator on page 5 75 Overload and Overheat Protection Overload protection is designed to protect the air suspension system and is an indication to
302. is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing the track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 for more information If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control 3 86 Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time An a
303. is released The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time D START This position starts the engine Key In the Ignition Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves If you leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle a chime will sound when you open the driver s door Always remember to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you This will lock your ignition and transmission Also always remember to lock the doors The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked You may not be able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an extended period of time Retained Accessory Power RAP These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off e Audio System e Sunroof e Power Windows The sunroof and power windows will continue to work up to 10 minutes after the key is turned to LOCK OFF or until any door is opened The radio will continue to work for up to 10 minutes after the key is turned to LOCK OFF or until the driver s door is opened 2 29 Starting the Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine will not start in any other position this is a safety fea
304. it at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not your engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater if available can help in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before starting your vehicle An internal thermostat in the plug
305. ith ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work for you You might feel the brakes vibrate or notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With ABS you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Control System TCS Your vehicle has a Traction Control System TCS that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction Wh
306. ith GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call emergency se
307. ith the wheels on your vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 62 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle 5 71 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this could affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes rollover airbags traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of
308. ith the RKE transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident press unlock on the RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and turn it to START to turn it off The alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm To test the alarm 1 From inside the vehicle lower the drivers window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the RKE transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm While the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is not operational If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5 111 and Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 113 If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer retailer 2 25 PASS Key IIl The PASS Key IIl system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two condit
309. ive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed This message displays along with a continuous chime if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir Also see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 35 for more information DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC The default settings for the customization f
310. ization button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The customization features will be set to their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button once to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs e The vehicle is no longer in ON RUN e The trip fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed e The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited e A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made 3 71 Audio System s Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the pages following to familiarize yourself with its features A CAUTION This system provides you with far greater access to audio stations and song listings Giving extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving can cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed Always keep your eyes on the road an
311. k well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope A CAUTION Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action See Off Road Driving on page 4 13 for information about driving off road 4 35 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving e Have your vehicle in good shape for winter e You might want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpe
312. l It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 75 You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record on page 6 16 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Gasoline Octane Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher but your vehicle s acceleration could be slightly reduced and you might notice a slight audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock If the octane is less than 87 you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a
313. l Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps ZD Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps listed below e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps When the headlamps are turned on while the ignition is on the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off When the headlamps are turned on while the ignition is off the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to prevent the battery from being drained Turn the headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes Headlamps on Reminder If a door is open a reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your key is out of the ignition To turn off the chime turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on or close and re open the door In the AUTO mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends if enabled in the DIC See Exit Lighting under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the s
314. laylists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then go to the root folder Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order e Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless you have chosen the folder mode as the default display The new track name displays 3 95 File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag the radio display is blank following the track indicator Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created by WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Pl
315. ld cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle 5 30 If there seems to be no leak start the engine again The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it does not your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 28 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you have not found a problem yet check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant on page 5 24 for more information If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows A
316. lder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 30 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Z CAUTION Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt cannot properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 37 A CAUTION Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child might slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The child could also move too far f
317. le and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 2 000 Ibs 900 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance
318. led into the player 3 Once the CD is loaded Disc 1 and Track 1 displays as the CD starts playback To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 Press and hold the 7 button for two seconds A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays 2 Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert the discs The CD player takes up to six CDs 3 Press the 7 button again to cancel loading more CDs If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When the CD is inserted the CD symbol displays As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner Playing a CD In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by th
319. lf or tuck under your clothing to keep warm 4 37 A CAUTION Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with the headlamps Let the heater run for a while 4 38 Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sa
320. lg gis cucaticassinecndiahanwacetodhneatnckneniowstes 1 2 Power Lumbar asics mna EOE nE 1 3 Heated Seats ores ecrecinernasem iensen eae 1 4 Memory Seat and Mirrors sssssssssessessresrernreee 1 4 Power Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeeneeeeeees 1 5 Head Restraints 2 cccccncceceset nanendra 1 7 Rear Seats sirina u i 1 8 Heated Seat ceisicusriisnenrarrerin ahi oriana ea 1 8 Split Folding Rear Seat seecsrerererrernnrrens 1 8 Third ROW Seat 2 20 cc ceeeceeeeeneeeeeeeea eee eea tenes 1 10 Safety Belts piriona on h enina anne a 1 16 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 1 16 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 22 Eap Shoulder Belt spiscina annenin 1 30 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 35 Safety Belt Extender cccseeeeeeeeeeee nents 1 35 Child Restraints ccceceeeeeeeeee eee eee eee ees 1 36 Older Children 0 2 sees eesti edie nae ident 1 36 Infants and Young Children ceeeeeeee ees 1 39 Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeeeeee nena 1 43 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 46 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH iiine orenen aiei ae sacean ade 1 47 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ceeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 1 57 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 0 ee 1 60 Airbag System cc cccceccee eee nee eee rererere 1
321. ll know how fast you are going about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically 3 32 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your vehicle s odometer works together with the driver information center You can set a Trip odometer See Trip Odometer under DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons on page 3 49 or DIC Operation and Displays Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem on page 3 54 for more information The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Simply press the trip stem on the instrument panel cluster If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero Press the trip stem to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer Holding the trip stem for approximately one second while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it To display the odometer reading with the ignition off press the trip stem Tachometer Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to faste
322. ll on the jack and retighten if necessary to make sure the jack is secure 5 Place the wheel blocks in the tool bag 6 Place the remaining tools in the tool bag 5 98 7 Replace the trim cover Make sure the latches are pushed down 8 10 Place the narrow end of the tool bag under the seat rails as shown and slide the tool bag under the rear seat Be careful not to pinch the seat cables or electrical harnesses Reinstall the strap to the seat rail for the tool bag Wrap the strap around the seat rail and then secure it to the tool bag Return the seat to the correct position See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 1 8 for more information Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 88 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools SUT on page 5 94 or Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools SUV on page 5 96 After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated The spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up to 70 mph 112 km h at the recommend
323. lsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5 117 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop the disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When you replace parts of the braking system for example when the brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved replacement parts If you do not the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery see your dealer retailer for one that has the replacemen
324. lso turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle you should see your dealer retailer for service Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control See Traction
325. lt or let the screen time out 3 73 MP3 Radio with a Six Disc CD Player If your vehicle has a radio with a six disc CD player it has a MENU button instead of the button to set the time and date To set the time and date follow these instructions 1 Press the MENU button Once the option displays press the pushbutton located under that label The HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one e Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right gt I SEEK arrow or the gt gt FWD forward button e To decrease press the left SEEK arrow or the lt lt REV reverse button You can also turn the Jd knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting 3 74 Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month day year to day month year To change the time or date default settings follow these instructions 1 Press the MENU button Once the option displays press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month
326. m on page 5 16 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I your second service be Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 13 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 16 An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components See footnote a o e Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote j ooo o e For vehicles driven in dusty dirty conditions Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection
327. m the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 WMA playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available
328. make sure it is locked into place Returning the Seats to an Upright Position A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked A CAUTION A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted To return the seat s to the upright position do the following 1 Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the way 2 Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position 3 Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion to make sure the seat is securely in place 4 Return the head rest SUV only to the upright position Third Row Seat Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat If your vehicle has a third row seat it is intended for 2 passengers and has only 2 designated seating positions You must fold the second row seat down before entering or exiting the third row See Folding the Seatbacks under Split Folding Rear Seat on page 1 8 earlier in this section for instructions The third row seatback can be folded and the entire seat can be tilted or removed from the vehicle Folding
329. manual Engine Specifications OOOO oe ain Co Spark Plug Gap Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule 0 ceeeeeeeeneees 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 6 8 IMMOCUCHION Seo s05 ica oeewpnereeteddacmdhael sibdeues dan sek deacons 6 2 At Each Fuel Pill onic ccccctesacesnag etedice cdietestiekders 6 9 Maintenance Requirements seeeeeeeee ee 6 2 At Least Once a Month ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 6 9 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year aseeseen 6 10 Using the Maintenance Schedule 0 6 2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 6 4 Maintenance Replacement Parts 4 6 14 Additional Required Services ceeeeeee eee 6 6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ccecce 6 15 Maintenance Footnotes cceeeeeeeeeeeee eters 6 7 Maintenance Record eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 6 16 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended GM Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer retailer for details Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubri
330. may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure Check your oil as soon as possible A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil 3 45 Oil Pressure Light A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil This light will come on briefly when you start your engine If it does not have your vehicle serviced When the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through your engine properly You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem 3 46 Security Light f Cruise Control Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Content Theft Deterrent on p
331. me Remote when completing Step 4 3 From inside your vehicle first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds Release the buttons to put the Universal Home Remote into programming mode Left Middle Right o 4 The indicator lights will blink slowly Enter each switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle s Universal Home Remote You will have two and one half minutes to complete Step 4 Now press one button on the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting as follows e If you wrote Left press the left button in the vehicle e If you wrote Right press the right button in the vehicle e If you wrote Middle press the middle button in the vehicle 2 62 5 After entering all of the switch positions again firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time The indicator lights will turn on 6 Press and hold the button you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink You may need to hold the button from five to 55 seconds 7 Immediately release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 8 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another Fixed Code device such as an additional garage door open
332. me luggage and gear in the vehicle as well You may add 300 Ibs 136 kg to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight Your vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg and you may think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds 318 kg from your trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits Your maximum trailer would only be 7 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think you must limit tongue weight to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But you must still consider the effect on the rear axle Because your rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg you can only put 900 Ibs 408 kg on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves you with being able to handle only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight you can expect that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer Total Weight on You
333. ment panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 3 37 Driving with this problem could drain the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible See your dealer retailer SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 38 If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service as soon as possible See your dealer retailer 3 60 SERVICE BRAKES SOON This message displays if there is a problem with the brake system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your dealer retailer SERVICE STABILITRAK This message displays when there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If you see this message try to reset the system Stop turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer retailer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however yo
334. mission see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 39 NEUTRAL N In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Also use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle DRIVE D This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down By doing this the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power DRIVE D can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often Downshifti
335. mode In this mode window express functions will not work The window can only be operated manually by pressing the Midgate window switch or the global window button The window will move slightly and stop Press and hold the window switch or global window button to continue to close the window a small amount at a time To Exit Error Jog Mode 1 Ensure normal Midgate window operating conditions have begun 2 Press and hold the Midgate window down switch approximately one second to start window express down 3 Release the window down switch and allow the window to fully open Do not use any window switches once window movement has started 4 Press the Midgate window up switch and visually confirm that the express up has been completed Sun Visors Swing the sun visor down to block glare Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors Swing the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on 2 23 Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft deterrent alarm system With this system the security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off This light reminds y
336. mps 008 3 17 5 50 Exterior Lamps erae iia sdoiee Svea Adigebeeiiees 3 15 FlaShalO PaSS peee aeai 3 9 Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps 5 49 Halogen Bulbs isicciitestecesceteddaszieaaces ze ngeia 5 48 High Low Beam Changer cee eee 3 8 On Reminder ssesiicesd see iiice teed 3 17 Roof Marker Lamps sseeeeeeeeneeeeeee eens 5 50 Heated Seats ccececececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 1 4 Heater sass cccccadnct da teccagd anew a a D 3 22 Highbeam On Light eeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneees 3 47 Highway Hypnosis 2 csi062 cecal a 4 34 Hill and Mountain Roads ce 4 35 Hood Checking Things Under ceeeeeeeee eee ees 5 9 REIA SEa e E E 5 10 OMIM Mee EE E TE kimi oe eenee ees 3 6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 22 Ignition POSITIONS iii arenae 2 28 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 39 Inflation Tire Pressure cceceeeeeeeeeeees 5 61 Instrument Panel OVEIVIEW aicscsdecicscatentiassieasisecsecstetdensdoisresentis 3 4 Instrument Panel I P BriQhth Ss tarsannan n cexeesee 3 18 GIWISTOR 8 ri Bsc conciccinaesn a samn ee a 3 32 Jump Starting cece eee niania eiiiai 5 40 Keyless Entry System c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 4 KEYS annn stabs no narenaeunnde a 2 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 56 Lamps DOME cesse anachaateaanaatsiaee
337. mps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 103 5 104 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get approved cleaning products from your dealer retailer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 108 If your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicl
338. ms with greater ease To sign up to My GM Canada visit the My GM Canada section within www gmcanada com Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs HUMMER has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user in the U S can communicate with HUMMER by dialing 1 800 833 6537 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices HUMMER encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail HUMMER refer to the addresses below United States Customer Assistance HUMMER Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33177 Detroit MI 48232 5177 www HUMMER com 1 866 HUMMER6 1 866 486 6376 1 800 833 6537 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 866 HUMMER6 1 866 486 6376 Fax Number 313 381 0022 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Fax Number 313 381 0022 From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 Overseas Customer Assi
339. n Adjust your driving accordingly See your dealer retailer for service See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 5 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 7 for more information STABILITRAK OFF This message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak or when the stability control has been automatically disabled To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 39 To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off see StabiliTrak System on page 4 7 There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear e The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See your dealer retailer e The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted into 4LO The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present 3 61 TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message may display along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 Reinstall the fuel
340. n See Cooling System on page 5 29 Remote Negative Terminal GND See Jump Starting on page 5 40 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Out of View See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 34 M N Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 40 Brake Fluid Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 36 Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 113 Battery See Battery on page 5 39 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 117 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil t
341. n and warning messages if a system problem is detected The DIC also allows some features to be customized See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 for more information You can also use the trip odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC displays See DIC Operation and Displays Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem later in this section 3 49 DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle information customization and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to display the odometer trip odometer fuel range average economy fuel used timer and transmission temperature i Vehicle Information Press this button to display the oil life units tire pressure readings engine hours and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter programming 3 50 EE Customization Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 63 for more information V Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Trip Fuel Menu Items ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Odometer Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Pressing the trip
342. n one second to initiate voice recognition and say OnStar to enter OnStar mode See the OnStar System on page 2 53 in this manual for more information SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if your vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary lt lt 1 Volume Press the plus or minus volume button to increase or to decrease the radio volume Dbl Seek Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM if equipped Press the seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot Press the seek arrow to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD player if multiple discs are loaded Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio recept
343. n page 1 47 for how to install your child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 47 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint If you have no other choice but to install a rear facing child restraint in this seat make sure the airbag is off once the child restraint has been installed When the airbag off switch has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag the off indicator in the airbag off light should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle See Airbag Off Light on page 3 35 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 61
344. n the band to choose the delay time The closer to the top of the lever the shorter the delay GED Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings BS High Speed For high speed wiping turn the band further to the second solid band past the delay settings O Off To stop the wipers move the band to off Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they are frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Windshield Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision VA Washer Fluid There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever Push the paddle to spray washer fluid on the windshield The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to the preset speed 4 Heated Washer Fluid If your vehicle has the heated windshield washer fluid system it is used to help clear ice snow tree sap or bugs from your windshield To activate Automatic mode for de icing press the heated washer button located to the left of the steering wheel below the instrument panel brightness control knob Pushing the heated washer fluid button activates the heated
345. n the ignition switch to LOCK OFF 11 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle s tires including the spare tire for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 69 for more information Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 69 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 74 5 68 Five Tire Rotation Pattern When rotating your vehicle s tires always use one of the correct rotation pattern shown here The five tire rotation pattern includes a full size spare tire and wheel assembly that matches the regular road tires and wheels in size type and brand After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 and Loading Your Vehicle on pag
346. n their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more LZ This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the drivers belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on 3 33 Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the center overhead console which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensors the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 64 This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready e re If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away 3 34 A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the airbag system may not be working properly The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yoursel
347. nconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles 16 km from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own please see your dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the allowance per rental day Rental reimbursement must be supported by original receipts This
348. ncrease to 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles 8 4 km etc If the retro active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started but before it begins moving the display will show the number of miles mi or kilometers km that were driven during the last ignition cycle Fuel Range Press the trip fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km the vehicle can be driven without refueling The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving Fuel range cannot be reset 3 51 Average Economy Press the trip fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset A
349. nd Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 40 If your vehicle has a traction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to your vehicle s traction system in the Index If the stuck condition is too severe for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 75 4 39 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels The traction control system activates when the system senses that the wheels are spinning See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 5 Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spin
350. nd Messages on page 3 56 To turn the chime and message off move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it Wu When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it W Mist For a single wiping cycle turn the band to mist Hold it there until the wipers start Then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on mist longer Delay You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Tur
351. nd Midgate window if equipped to be opened or closed at the same time V Window Express Down Press the express down button to lower all side windows and Midgate window if equipped without stopping Express down will operate while the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY or while Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 Pressing the global express down button also activates the power Midgate latch release buttons if equipped See Lowering the Midgate under Midgate on page 2 14 The express down feature can also be operated through the Remote Keyless Access RKE transmitter Press and hold the unlock button on the transmitter until the windows start to lower See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Window Up Press and hold the up button to raise the four side windows and if equipped the Midgate window The up button operates while the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY or while RAP is active 2 21 Midgate Window Midgate Window On vehicles with a Midgate the switch to operate the window is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3 4 V Press to express down the window Press to express up the window Press the top or bottom of the switch a second time to stop the window The window switch will operate while the ignition is in ON R
352. nd Tire Balance 5 74 Wheel Replacement 0 seeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 74 When It Is Time for New Tires e eee 5 69 TOOUWIK seasea ahneecat athe E 4 42 Tow Haul Mode eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 2 36 Tow Haul Mode Light cceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee ee 3 47 Towing Recreational Vehicle cceeeeeeeeeereeees 4 51 Towing a Trailer sess csncccaaeeiest acti ain E 4 55 NOUR VehiCle dei iin igante 4 51 Traction Control System TCS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een ees 4 5 StabiliTrak Syston esras aisinn 4 7 Trailer Recommendations 0 cseeeeeeeeeeceeeereeees 4 67 Transmission Fluid AUTOMAUG sssini 5 21 Transmission Operation Automatic 5 2 32 Tip Odometef v2 0 decent sandbilanaecdedewenduacden dette 3 33 Turn and Lane Change Signals c ceeeeeees 3 8 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ceeeeeeeeeee ee 3 7 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeeeeeees 5 72 Universal Home Remote System eeeeees 2 57 Operation saans nara a nE Enia 2 57 Using this Manual 3 cciceccccncneneneteienannteadieeaaecaneensinds iii Vehicle COMMONS ee E sant aaceas 4 3 Damage Warnings seeeeeeeeeeeee tensa eeeeeees iv Loading eeraa n heres tia annie ates eee 4 44 SYMON E E iv Vehicle Customization DIC cccccee cece ees 3 63 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
353. nd a menu is active DVD A Audio Display Buttons Once a DVD A is inserted radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed after for more information The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD A menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 for more information The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the DVD A is inserted into the DVD slot It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button gt il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on the display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on the display the system is in playback mode lt Group P gt Press this button to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD A disc Nav Navigate Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus d Audio Stream Press this button to cycle through audio stream formats located on the DVD A disc The video screen shows the audio stream changing Inserting a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player might not accept some
354. nded for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 5 70 Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on 5 65 TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key 5 66 You have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions I
355. ndle has this graphic See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information 5 22 3 Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading 5 If the fluid level is below the COLD check band add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5L Do not overfill 6 Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 160 F to 200 F 71 C to 93 C 7 f the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 160 F and 200 F 71 C and 93 C The hot check is the most accurate method to check the fluid level The hot check should be performed at the first opportunity in order to verify the cold check The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases so it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is within range 1 Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle The dipstick handle has this graphic See
356. ng Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 75 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed 5 110 Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block access door is located LT DR PY Side Power Window Circuit on the driver side
357. ng the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 4 12 MANUAL MODE M This position lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions If your vehicle has this feature see Driver Shift Control DSC later in this section Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by your warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place 2 33 SECOND 2 This position reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes Use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you may also want to use the brakes off and on FIRST 1 This position reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes Use it for major severe downgrades and off road driving where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade When you shift to SECOND 2 or FIRST 1 it provides the lowest gear appropriate to your current road speed and continues to downshift as the vehicle slows eventually downshifting to the selected gear Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts This shift stabilization featu
358. ngine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 28 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 28 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency 5 27 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine The ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message along with a low coolant condition can indicate a serious problem If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you e Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving e Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow a trailer See Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 If you get the E
359. ning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out Or you can use the recovery loops If your vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 51 4 40 Recovery Loops A CAUTION These loops when used are under a lot of force Keep people away from the vicinity of the loops and any chains or cables during use Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the loops at a sideways angle The loops could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back Notice Never use the recovery loops to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty Front of Vehicle Rear of Vehicle Your vehicle may have recovery loops at the front and rear of the vehicle You may need to use them if you are stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving First Aid Kit and Tool Kit The first aid and tool kit is located in the storage bin behind the spare tire on SUV models It is held in place with a hook and loop fastener strap On SUT models the kit is in the rear cargo compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle The tire pressure gage has a reset button in the gage stem After taking a pressure reading press the button to reset the gag
360. nning Lamps eceeeeeeeeeeeee eee 3 17 Defensive Driving ceeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Delayed Locking s s2tsicitcnieieedicieeeteaeean 2 11 DISE MES eaa EE E 3 94 3 98 Doing Your Own Service Work sasececesececereeee 5 4 Dome Lamp Override ccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneees 3 19 Dome LampS s ciccstiadsderdsaendonsad cannes emedenanceys 3 19 Door Delayed LOCKING mranani 2 11 LOCKS cni sisiienienacednnpiii eene aa 2 10 Power Door LOCKS iai 6c00 di sicinse siaderaseteesens datas 2 11 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS 0eeeeeeeeeee ees 2 12 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeee 3 49 DIC Operation and Displays 3 49 3 54 DIC Vehicle Customization ceeeeeeeeee 3 63 DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 56 Driving At NIQNt siccsetirokiiedeslieciete ce eels 4 32 Before a Long Tip sassccseseicccanecneencheatiaserantines 4 34 Defensie sidsevsieen div ieadass e a eens e 4 2 DGUNK GMs sense stance dente eel ackaeusen E 4 2 First Aid and Tool Kit 2 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ee 4 42 Front Mounted Receiver ceeeeeeeeee eee ee 4 43 Highway Hypnosis seirian csent 4 34 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 35 In Rain and on Wet Roads lecce 4 33 OMROED inar hann eaa aai E T EAn 4 13 Power Winch Platform soisrsnrinonesieianss 4 43 Recovery LOOPS carniera ra aA 4 40 Rocking Your
361. noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible 5 78 A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers When you have a flat tire use the following example as a A CAUTION guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to i change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving FS gt gt Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in PARK P Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the The following steps will tell you next how t
362. not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 55 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle See Certification Tire Label later in this section 4 45 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants
363. nside the vehicle Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adjusting the outlet temperature fan speed and the air delivery mode The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures 3 27 Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity moisture condensing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly There are two modes to clear fog or frost from the windshield Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog or defrost modes 5 Defog The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers This mode directs air to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents When this mode is selected the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear W Defrost Press this button to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly This mode directs a portion of the air to the windshield and side window vents and some to the floor
364. nsmission into gear before the indicator light stops flashing could cause damage to the transfer case Always wait until the indicator light stops flashing before putting the transmission back in gear It is normal for your vehicle to have engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Low and Four Wheel High or Four Wheel High Lock ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine running If the Four Wheel Low Lock position is selected when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Low Lock indicator light will flash for 15 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 5 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N After 15 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen Shifting Out of Four Wheel Low Lock To shift from Four Wheel Low Lock to Four Wheel High or Four Wheel High Lock your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 5 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N and the ignition in RUN The preferred method for shifting out of Four Wheel Low Lock is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Turn the dial to the Four Wheel High or Four Wheel High Lock position You must wait for the Four Wheel High or Four Wheel High Lock indicator light to stop flashing and remain lit before shifting your transmission into gear It is normal for your vehicle to have engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Low and Four Wheel Hig
365. nt contact your dealer retailer Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 27 5 24 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will e Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C e Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protect against rust and corrosion e Help keep the proper engine temperature e Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at the first maintenance service after each 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle What Kind of Coolant to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which will not damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do not need to add anything else A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling s
366. nually change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Repeatedly press the T or button until the desired mode appears on the display Pressing one of these buttons when the system is off will change air delivery mode without turning the system on Pressing one of these buttons when in automatic control will place the mode under manual control The air delivery mode setting remains displayed AUTO is no longer displayed and the AUTO button indicator light turns off 7s Vent This setting will deliver air to the instrument panel outlets td Bi Level This mode directs half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets id Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some of the air directed to the windshield side window outlets and second row floor outlets In this mode the system automatically selects outside air hal Defog See Defogging and Defrosting later in this section lt amp Recirculation Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on When the button is pressed an indicator light will come on This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle It can be used to reduce out
367. o use the vehicle jack and change a tire To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle 5 79 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools SUT The jack is stored in the rear cargo compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle The tools for the jack are stored under the rear passenger s seat To remove the tools 1 Locate the tools by lifting the driver s side second row seat up to expose the floor See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 1 8 for more information 5 80 Remove the strap from the seat rail Then carefully slide the tool bag out from under the seat rail as shown Take care to not pinch the seat cables or electrical harnesses Open the tool bag You will find the following tools needed to remove the spare tire and flat tire A Jack Handle B Jack Handle Extensions 2 C Wheel Wrench D Wheel Wrench Extension E Wheel Blocks To access the jack remove the cover unlock it and then pull the cover off 5 81 Before proceeding be sure to set the wheel blocks at the appropriate tire as previously shown Remove the wheel blocks from the tool bag Then lift the wheel block as shown to lock it into place Release the jack by inserting the wheel wrench A into the hole B and turn counterclockwise
368. oard passenger positions in the third row 1 68 A CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering If your vehicle has roof rail airbags never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the
369. obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 866 HUMMER6 486 6376 or write HUMMER Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33177 Detroit MI 48232 5177 In Canada call 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and int
370. ome on steady when the traction control system has been turned off This light flashes when TCS is active ee If you press the TCS button the traction control system will turn off and a TRACTION CONTROL OFF message will appear on the DIC Press the TCS button again to turn the system back on The TRACTION CONTROL OFF message will then go off The Traction Control System will reset itself at each ignition cycle Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Locking Rear Axle The locking rear axle can give the vehicle additional traction from the rear wheels when traveling in off road situations such as mud snow sand steep hills and uneven terrain The button used to turn this feature on or off is located below the transfer case dial to the right of the steering wheel 4 To lock the rear axle 1 Place the transfer case in the Four Wheel Low Lock mode This is the only mode which will allow the rear axle to lock See Full Time Four Wheel Drive on page 2 36 for more information regarding the transfer case and Four Wheel Low Lock mode 2 Press the button with the vehicle stopped or moving less than 2 mph 3 km h You must wait for the light in the button to stop flashing and remain illuminated before the rear axle is locked Notice If you try to lock the rear axle while your vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning you co
371. ommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The fuel cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle Open the door to access the fuel ca
372. on 2 To remove the center cap place the flat end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and carefully pry the center cap out 5 Remove the three wheel nuts holding the spare tire onto the tire carrier 6 Pull off the spare tire and gently lower it to the ground Set it next to the flat tire 3 Attach the wheel wrench to the extender 5 88 Front Flat Tire Attach the jack handle with the hook end connected to the hole on the jack Slide the wheel wrench onto the jack handle extension 4 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Do not remove them yet Now jack the vehicle up 5 Assemble the jack and tools Rear Flat Tire Assemble the jack together with the jack handle and the jack handle extensions 5 89 6 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack head to the lifting point Rear Flat Tire Jack Rear Flat Tire Place the jack under the curved Front Flat Tire Jack rear axle pad Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the rear axle pad is resting securely on 7 Front Flat Tire Position the jack under the vehicle the jack head on the front lower control arm behind the flat tire A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack 5 90 A CAUTION Raising your ve
373. one This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts A CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a Safety belt properly If you are ina crash and you are not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from it and be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too A CAUTION People riding on the tailgate if equipped can easily lose their balance and fall even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or death A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 33 In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a cras
374. or to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT 3 99 Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order e Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When t
375. ories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread 5 58 Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Lo
376. ormation for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Road Driving on page 4 13 Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you can carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle The Cargo Weight Rating CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It does not include the weight of the people inside But you can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each seat The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle s CWR Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the g
377. orrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this w
378. orward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 1 38 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle In addition young children should not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone they need to use a child restraint 1 39 A CAUTION People should never hold an infant in their arms while riding in a vehicle An infant does not weigh much until a crash During a crash an infant will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg infant will suddenly become a 240 Ib
379. ote The motor head dip switch settings can also be used when you do not have the original hand held transmitter Switch Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 Switch Position On On NeutralNeutrall Off Off Off Off Your Universal Home i i oL 22 5 7 8 N eej e E A 7 Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions T pia Eia ca Ea 5 Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as they do in the examples above but they should be similar PetcoNumee E 4 The switch positions on your hand held transmitter Swich Position On On Off may be labeled as follows ee Ee ee e A switch in the up position may be labeled as Up or On Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions A SWIER Ine GOW posINonmay pe pega s Down or Off e A switch in the middle position may be labeled as Middle 0 or Neutral 2 61 2 Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows e When a switch is in the up position write Left e When a switch is in the down position write Right e If a switch is set between the up and down position write Middle The switch settings that you wrote down in Step 2 will now become the button strokes you enter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4 Be sure to enter the switch settings that you wrote down in Step 2 in order from left On Neutra Off to right into the Universal Ho
380. ote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler and maybe other parts too A CAUTION caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 42 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable at terminal of the dead battery Use a remote least 12 inches 30 cm away from the dead battery positive terminal if the vehicle has one but not near engine parts that move The electrical 7 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to rai i is e Aa age and the ia the positive terminal of the good battery Use a of sparks getting ae to the attery is much less remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the one
381. other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the Midgate e Make sure all windows are shut e Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed on the setting that brings in outside air This will force outside air into your vehicle See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 2 43 The Midgate allows you to extend the length of your vehicle s cargo area into the cab Lowering the Midgate The Midgate window must be completely lowered for the Midgate to be lowered See Midgate Window under Power Windows on page 2 20 Both the Midgate and the Midgate window can be lowered while the ignition is in either ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY or while in Retained Accessory Power RAP mode See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 for more information To lower the Midgate do the following 1 Fold the rear seats forward See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 1 8 The front seats may have to be moved forward slightly 2 Midgate Window Press the bottom part of this switch to lower the Midgate window See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3 4 for the location of this switch The window can also be operated using the global express down button See Global Glass Feature under Power Windows on page 2 20 Raising the Midgate To raise the Midgate
382. ou leave the vehicle Leave it in some gear A CAUTION Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P This is because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone else could be injured If you are going to leave your vehicle set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK P But do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL Leave the transfer case in the 4 HI 4 HI Lock or 4 LO Lock position Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you will want to consider a number of things e How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain vehicle control e What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel e Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they will not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times A CAUTION Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under
383. ou to activate the theft deterrent system 2 24 To activate the theft deterrent system i 2 Open the door Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The security light will illuminate to inform the driver the system is arming If a door is open when the doors are locked the security light will flash Close all doors The security light should go off after about 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the security light goes off If the delayed locking feature is turned on the theft deterrent system will not start the arming process until the last door is closed and the delay timer has expired See Delayed Locking on page 2 11 If a locked door is opened without the RKE transmitter the alarm will go off The headlamps and parking lamps will flash and the horn will sound for 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power Remember the theft deterrent system will not activate if you lock the doors with the vehicle s key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open or with the RKE transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident e If you do not want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock a door w
384. ous topics See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information Only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls Your vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 116 for more information On some vehicles you may have to hold the button for a few seconds and give the command ONSTAR to activate the OnStar Hands Free Calling On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voicemail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information 2 55 How OnStar Service Works Your vehicle s OnStar system has the capability of recording and transmitting vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys The vehicle information usually includes your GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the accident that your vehicle has been involved in e g the direction from which your vehicle was hit When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling your vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we can provide you with location based services OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider
385. out of the vehicle Installing the Seat A CAUTION A CAUTION A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted To install the seat do the following LN CAUTION 1 While holding the rear of the seat up slide the front wheels into the slots on the floor The front latches 7 should lock into place If the latches do not lock A seat that is not locked into place properly try tilting the rear of the seat upward can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it 2 Once the latches are engaged pull up on the lever labeled 3 to allow the seat to drop into place 3 Pull up on the lever labeled 1 to return the seatback to its upright position 4 Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place The seatback cannot be raised to the upright position unless the seat is secured to the floor Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Every
386. ow Seat ccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 10 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeee teeter teen ees 1 57 Right Front Seat Position ee 1 60 DOCUNTY LIJANE sieer nea een iEn E na 3 46 Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height 4 53 SEVICE sasama a A E E 5 3 Accessories and Modifications ee 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle a sceiciecaceccaeccss anani 5 4 California Pershlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 California Proposition 65 Warning 0 5 3 Doing Your Own Work ecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenes 5 4 Engine Soon Light ice cciieseieneteesatetea ait iese 3 42 Publications Ordering Information 7 15 Service Scheduling Appointments 008 7 8 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 75 Sheet Metal Damage ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 106 Shifting Into Park P ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee tenes 2 41 shifting Out of Park P ees misaonom anana 2 42 Side Steps nnee e a EED EEEE OE 4 32 Signals Turn and Lane Change 005 3 8 Spare Tie ccccuscisotanstddatesteactiadtsacndauneeneedauanee 5 99 Carrier Tailgate cccceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 16 Installing aaee a a aT 5 88 REMOVING ecran na A ENa 5 80 5 84 SIONN ws scscciceseedcsewcedeucas dees eiavieesssere sees 5 94 5 96 Specifications Capacities eeeeeeeeeeeeee ee
387. owing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 5 13 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood here is what you will see Le et A Coolant Surge Tank B Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C Engine Cooling Fan A CAUTION An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface Check the coolant level after the system cools down Some amount of coolant may be lost due to overheating The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it is not you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system A CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That cou
388. p If beyond this radius we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest HUMMER dealership Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary HUMMER parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs Calling for Assistance For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance Representative e Your name home address and home telephone number e Telephone number of your location e Location of the vehicle e Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle e Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle e Description of the problem Towing and Road Service Exclusions Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on a non public roadway or highway fines impound towing caused by a violation of local Municipal State Provincial or Federal law and mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty HUMMER and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and reques
389. p To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise While refueling let the fuel cap hang by the tether if it has one A CAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 103 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC if the fuel cap is not properly installed See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information A CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice f you need a new fuel cap be sure to
390. parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions See Tow Haul Mode following 4 56 Three important considerations have to do with weight e the weight of the trailer e the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle s tires Tow Haul Mode Tow Haul mode is used when using your vehicle to pull a large or heavy load or trailer Tow haul is also useful while pulling a load in rolling terrain in stop and go traffic or when you need improved low speed control such as when parking The purpose of the tow haul mode is to do the following Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less accelerator pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Tow Haul mode is most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is
391. performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 5 70 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information 5 72 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The trea
392. play is now disabled To turn on the rear camera vision feature again press the right button on the inside rear view mirror briefly The green light indicator will illuminate The rear camera vision system is now enabled and the display will slide out from the mirror normally Cleaning the Camera Screen To manually slide out the rear camera screen for cleaning do the following 1 Shift into P PARK 2 Turn the ignition key to the RUN position 3 Press and hold the right button on the inside rear view mirror for five seconds The display will slide out from the mirror for 30 seconds the right green LED indicator will remain illuminated The camera screen will not be on when it slides out of the mirror 4 If additional time is required for cleaning repeat step 3 To resume normal operation press the right button momentarily while the rear camera screen is out or wait 30 seconds for screen to slide back into the mirror For more information on the automatic dimming compass and temperature features of the mirror see Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display on page 2 45 A CAUTION The Rear Vision Camera RVC system does not replace driver vision RVC does not e Detect objects that are outside the camera s field of view below the bumper or underneath the vehicle e Detect children pedestrians bicyclists or pets Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear vision
393. pport your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare tire See Spare Tire on page 5 99 for additional information How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps
394. ps remove the steps prior to off roading to give your vehicle more ground clearance and to prevent damage to the vehicle from the side steps dragging and or catching on obstacles Notice Do not drive off road with the side steps attached to your vehicle You can damage the side steps and or your vehicle s frame if they get caught or drag against an obstacle This damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Always remove the side steps prior to any off road driving 4 32 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night riving tips include e Drive defensively Do not drink and drive e Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror e Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because your headlamps can only light up so much road ahead e Watch for animals e When tired pull off the road e Do not wear sunglasses e Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps e Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out e Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old Driving in Rain
395. r Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu L Display Menu Press this button to adjust the brightness screen display mode normal full or zoom and display the language menu amp gt Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active HM Stop Press this button to stop playing fast reversing or fast forwarding a DVD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to start playing a DVD Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause it Press it again to continue playing the DVD While the DVD is playing the DVD can be played slowly by pressing the play pause button then pressing the fast forward button The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode Also reverse can be played slowly by pressing the play pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button To cancel slow play mode press the play pause button 4 Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Next Track Chapter Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button might not work while the DVD is play
396. r approximately 5 seconds When AUTO is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run when the outside temperature is over about 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet may automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down the vehicle The light on the button will illuminate in recirculation 3 23 2 Set the driver s and passenger s temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 74 F 23 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Use the driver s or passenger s temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If you choose the temperature setting of 60 F 15 C the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting If you choose the temperature setting of 90 F 32 C the system will remain at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on your headlamps For more information on the solar sensor see Sensors later in this section 3 24 To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is avail
397. r Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You will find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle or the GAWR including the weight of the trailer tongue If you use a weight distributing hitch make sure you don t go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight distribution spring bars 4 61 Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so that the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle 4 62 If you will be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than these limits You can ask a hitch dealer retailer about sway controls Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehic
398. r filled e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 55 4 33 Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps 4 34 Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated Keep interior temperature cool Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include e Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape e Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling system and transmission e Going down steep or long hills shift to a lower gear A CAUTION If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not wor
399. r is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R RW DVD R RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats If an error message displays on the video screen or the radio see DVD Display Error Messages under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 and DVD Radio Error Messages in this section for more information 3 88 Playing a DVD DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 for more information b Power Pr
400. r sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof rail airbags 1 65 Where Are the Airbags A CAUTION Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 36 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 39 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag FX symbol The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 34 for more information 1 66 The right front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side MEZ goa f gt 2 _ Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar The roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar If your vehicle has roof rail airbags and a third row passenger seat the airbags are located in the ceiling above the rear windows for the outb
401. r slot is able to read 255 folders 15 playlists and 40 sessions Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to eight subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a m3u wpl or pls extension as other file extensions might not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists could cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions If you wish to play a large number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off Finalize the audio disc before you burn it Trying to add music to an existing disc could cause the disc not to function in the player Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed pri
402. railer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased 2 28 Ignition Positions Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different positions In order to shift out of PARK P ignition must be in the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied A LOCK OFF This position locks the ignition and transmission It is a theft deterrent feature The key can only be removed when the ignition is turned to LOCK OFF Notice Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand Make sure the key is all the way in If it is turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard If none of this works then your vehicle needs service B ACC ACCESSORY This position lets things like the radio and the windshield wipers operate while the engine is off Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the ACC ACCESSORY ignition position and the ON RUN position may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from starting Do not operate your vehicle in the ACC ACCESSORY ignition position for a long period of time C ON RUN This is the position for driving It is the position the ignition switch returns to after the engine starts and the key
403. raint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and 4 Push and pull the child restraint in different the instructions in this manual directions to be sure it is secure 2 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 2 2 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked 1 55 Second and Third Row Positions SUV 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if equipped Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 2 1 Find the top tether anchor 1 56 2 2 Route attach and tighten the top tether
404. ransaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the HUMMER Consumer Relations Manager by calling 1 866 HUMMER6 486 6376 Customer Assistance prompt In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French 7 2 We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting HUMMER please
405. re is designed to determine before making an upshift if the engine will be able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed throttle position and 2 34 vehicle load If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear In some cases this may appear to be a delayed shift however the transmission is operating normally Your vehicle s transmission uses adaptive shift controls that compares key shift parameters to pre programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer The transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used such as with a heavy load or when temperature changes During this adaptive shift controls process shifting may feel different as the transmission determines the best settings When temperatures are very cold the Hydra Matic 6L80 automatic transmission s gear shifting may be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold transmission This difference in shifting is normal Driver Shift Control DSC Your vehicle has a Driver Shift Control DSC The DSC controls the vehicle s transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer by allowing you to select a desired range of gears To use this feature
406. rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off The hazard warning flashers work no matter what ignition position the key is in and even if the key is not in the ignition When the hazard warning flashers are on your vehicle s turn signals will not work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Horn Press on or near the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn Tilt Wheel The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following The tilt lever is located on the driver s side of the steering column under the turn signal lever To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever Move the steering wheel to a comfortable a level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place Turn and Lane Change Signals Turn and Lane Change Signals on page 3 8 AD ZID Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 Flash to Pass Feature See Flash to Pass on page 3 9 SY Windshield Wipers See Windshield Wipers on page 3 9 Windshield Washer See Windshield Washer on page 3 10
407. reasing or increasing Passenger s Side Temperature Control The passenger s temperature buttons can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger s side of the vehicle The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The passenger side display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing The passenger s temperature setting can be set to match the driver s temperature setting by pressing the PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator When the passenger s temperature setting is set different than the driver s setting the indicator on the PASS button will illuminate and both the driver s side and passenger s side temperature displays will be shown Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active the system will control the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode 1 Press the AUTO button When AUTO is selected the display will change to show the current temperature s and AUTO will be lit on the display The current delivery mode and fan speed will also be displayed fo
408. replace your own judgment See the Navigation System manual for some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio system The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a video display screen audio video jacks two wireless headphones and a remote control See Radio s MP3 on page 3 75 for more information on the vehicle s audio DVD system Before You Drive The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system might not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE system is above 4 F 20 C or below 140 F 60 C If the temperature of your vehicle is outside of this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system Parental Control The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature depending on which radio you have To start Parental Control press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds to stop all system features such as radio video screen RSA DVD and or CD While Parental Control is on a padlock icon displays The radio can be turned back on with a
409. ress the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds and immediately release them o Gonos oor 10 Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit and may be a colored button Press this button After you press this button you will have 30 seconds to complete the following steps 3 Immediately return to your vehicle Press and hold the Universal Home Remote button that you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink You may need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds 4 Immediately within one second release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 5 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 5 choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener If these instructions do not work you probably have a Fixed Code garage door opener Follow the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opener
410. ress this button to quickly reverse the CD or DVD at five times the normal speed The radio displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse To stop fast reversing press this button again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews D gt FWD Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the CD or DVD The radio displays the elapsed time and fast forwards five times the normal speed To stop fast forwarding press this button again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews A Eject Press this button to eject a CD or DVD If a CD or DVD is ejected but not removed the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed because of an unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 3 89 DVD V Video Display Buttons Once a DVD V is inserted the radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed after for more information The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD V menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 for more information The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DV
411. rgo within recommended limits You will find these limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving on page 4 13 e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 7 for further information A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should have your dealer retailer do these jobs When you go to your dealer retailer for your service needs you will know that trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts If you want to purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Owner Checks and Serv
412. ria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C Dual Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 61 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 D DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards E Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture F Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread G Single Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size LT245 75R16 E120 116S Ilo A B CDE F Light Truck LT Metric Tire
413. rn it off Indicator bars next to the symbol will designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats are off when the ignition is off Split Folding Rear Seat The split bench seats can be folded to give you more cargo space Folding the Seatbacks The seatbacks are equipped with rearward folding head rests SUV only When the seatback is being folded down the head rest will automatically fold rearward To fold the rear seat do the following 1 Make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat 2 Pull up on the strap loop located at the rear of the seat cushion and pull the seat cushion up and fold it forward Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 3 Pull the seatback forward and fold it down until it is flat If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with the cushion try moving the front seat forward and or bringing the front seatback more upright 4 Repeat the steps for the other half of the split bench seat Z CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to
414. round and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing e What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations e How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow e Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations e ls your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 34 4 51 Dinghy Towing Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle 1 Shift the transmission to PARK P 2 Turn the engine off but leave the ignition in ACCESSORY 3 Firmly set the parking brake 4 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle A CAUTION Shifting a full time four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you s
415. rt the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to the ON RUN position within five seconds of turning the ignition to the LOCK OFF position in Step 3 The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you lose or damage your PASS Key IIl key see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have a new key made Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle 2 27 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines e Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km e Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle e Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings e Do not tow a t
416. rtist and album ID3 tag information It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD R or CD RW The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetic order on the CD R or CD RW and begin playing MP3 files by that artist If you want to listen to MP3 files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button You will go to the next or previous artist in alphabetic order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed 3 97 To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetic order on the CD R or CD RW and begin playing MP3 files from that album To exit music navigator mo
417. rts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer retailer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also
418. rts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your dealer retailer may have a collision repair center w
419. rvices for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report
420. rward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle e The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items in the rear area as far forward as you can e Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain does not toss things around You will find other important information in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 and Tires on page 5 55 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment e Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations e Avoid any driving pr
421. ry do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 1 35 Child Restraints The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder Older Children belt until the child passes the below fit test e Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat e Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 30 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat e Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat e Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip If yes continue If no return Older children who have outgrown booster seats should to the booster seat wear the vehicle s safety belts 1 36 Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts An older child should wear a lap shou
422. ry inflator on The indicator light will remain on while the inflator is running When you are finished using the inflator press and release the switch to turn it off Place the inflator kit tools and the hose back in the pouch If your vehicle is equipped with the air suspension system load leveling will not function with the inflator hose attached to the inflator outlet A CAUTION Inflating something too much can make it explode and you or others could be injured Be sure to read the inflator instructions and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure 5 77 If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and
423. s e Roadside Assistance e Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance e AccidentAssist e Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert e OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics e OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 complimentary minutes e OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only Available Services included with Directions amp Connections Plan e All Safe and Sound Plan Services e Driving Directions Advisor delivered or OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped e RideAssist e Information and Convenience Services OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid Minute Packages Hands Free Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit www onstar com or www onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses your minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice commands you can browse through the vari
424. s 5 117 Speedometer sarc ciiiecisasicdawe dap mndmeubaned detect ier aena 3 33 Split Folding Rear Seat ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 1 8 StabiliTrak System cccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeees 4 7 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 0 0ccccccssseseees 3 40 Start Vehicle Remote ccccccceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 Starting the Engine cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 30 11 SICCHIMNG ceeshias feraeten tiga eases E 4 9 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 0065 3 116 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel 0cceeeeeeeee 3 6 Storage Areas All Weather Cargo Area cccceeeneeeeeneeeeenes 2 66 Center Console Storage Area eeeeeeee 2 64 Cupholder S ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 2 64 GIOVE BOX csere irere rio a Ena veda adwseed cx 2 64 Luggage Carrier ses niriarriinsi ieii mieso isats 2 65 Rear Seat Armrest cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 65 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 008 4 39 SUN VISOIS sciindan ae 2 23 SUMOO veeri a a E AE Ea E 2 67 Tachometer seia eaan e a EEO 3 33 Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier ccenn 2 16 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps 5 51 Theft Deterrent Radio cccccceceeeeeeeeeee eee 3 116 Theft Deterrent Systems ceceeeeeeeeeeeee eens 2 24 Content Theft Deterrent ssesssisrererererere 2 24 PASS Key II oo ccccccsesscesecssssesseseeeseessceseses 2 26 PA
425. s after it is released If the rear wiper function was already on prior to pressing the wash button it will stay on until the wiper button is pressed again Delay Press this side of the button to turn on delayed wiping The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in the windshield washer reservoir See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 35 Cruise Control A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads With cruise control a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When you apply your brakes cruise control is turned off If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak system or Traction Control system TCS and begins to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control the cruise control will automatically disengage See StabiliTrak System on page 4 7 or Traction Control System TCS on page 4 5 When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you can turn the cruise control back on The cruise control buttons are located
426. s channel The system is working properly No CAT Info No category information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Information No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel The system is working properly CAT Not Found There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM TheftLocked The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message appears after having your vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service 3 104 Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM Receivr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer Navigation Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system The navigation system has built in features intended to minimize driver distraction Technology alone no matter how advanced can never
427. s in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control your vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of your vehicle See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 5 Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 38 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the
428. s in the Radio DVD slot the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display See Radio s MP3 on page 3 75 for more information Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by your warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place If the remote control becomes lost or damaged a new universal remote control can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba 3 109 Remote Control Buttons D Power Press this button to turn the video screen on and off X Illumination Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight automatically times out after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on pal Title Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function could vary for each disc 3 110 Main Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A W lt gt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu lt Ente
429. s not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked To return the seatback to an upright position do the 4 Push down on the seat firmly Try pulling it up to be following sure it is locked into place 5 Pull up on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the seatback until the seatback locks into the upright position 5E ZL 1 Pull the lever labeled 3 toward you 2 While still holding lever 3 toward you grasp the top of the seat and pull it toward you slightly 3 Let go of lever 3 and pull the seat completely down Removing the Seat To remove the seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Fold the seatback forward onto the seat cushion by using the lever labeled 1 The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is folded 3 To unlatch the rear of the seat from the floor pull up on the release lever labeled 2 at the rear of the seat and lift the rear of the seat up from the floor Squeeze the release handle while pulling the seat out of the slots on the floor While holding the rear of the seat up roll the seat
430. s you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger belt out all the way you may engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again 1 30 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 35 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary 4 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way When the safety belt is not in use slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt near the guide loop on the side wall Before you close a door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle 1 31 Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants Although you cannot see them they are part of the safety belt assembly They c
431. save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle the headphones lose the audio signal The headphones automatically turn off after four hours of continuous use To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side For optimal audio performance the headphones must be worn correctly The symbol L Left appears on the upper left side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear The symbol R Right appears on the upper right side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by your warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the baiteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set Refer to your dealer retailer for more information Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones do the following 1 Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones Slide the battery door open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on
432. sdevnntoteadcecendsedendestane 5 7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 0 08 5 9 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 9 Hood Release oiaren ieena E N O 5 10 Engine Compartment Overview 5 12 Engine Oil scctschsteoiosatdtsaeneneteddengumeticnentnaanete 5 13 Engine Oil Life System n a 5 16 Engine Air Cleaner Filter c ee 5 18 Automatic Transmission Fluid i e 5 21 Engine Coolant rasisms iienaa anA 5 24 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap 0 5 26 Engine Overheating ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eters 5 27 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode sensies nnna 5 28 Cooling System siss arin inin EE A EAR 5 29 Engine Fan Noise eceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 33 Power Steering Fluid cceeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 34 Windshield Washer Fluid ceeeeeeeeee eee es 5 35 BiAKOS f26chcecehdecdde ade hede ad eeobsanalebatitewateadiendeed 5 36 Battery n iaoee aea saunders ch nemenasananemne nosey 5 39 JUMP Starting emrinin niana eein 5 40 Real Axle inene oia a Aiton Lad 5 45 Four Wheel Drive cceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenes 5 46 Front AXl atnan iaia naon RE 5 47 Bulb Replacement nnn 5 48 Halogen Bulbs raonar e aarre 5 48 Headl mips terrne r E 5 48 Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps 5 49 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 04 5 50 Roof Marker Lamps eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 50 Taillamps Turn Si
433. se aacncuans 3 19 Dome Lamp Override 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 19 Reading s si acciccesvicieteeveres a tenes eve eee 3 19 Lap Shoulder Belt cccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 30 LATCH System Child Restraints ccceeeeeeee eee eeeeeee een eees 1 47 Liftgate Carbon Monoxide cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 2 13 Light Airbag Offi sssassitisadess es titsanietieial ea aE ES 3 35 Airbag Readiness ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen tees 3 34 Antilock Brake System Warning 000 3 39 Brake System Warning cceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 38 Charging System cccceeeeeeeee eee nessies 3 37 Cruise Contolera 3 46 Highbeam ON cceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee eeeeen een ees 3 47 Low Fuel Warning c eeeeeeeeeeeee tense tenes 3 48 Malfunction Indicator ececeeeeeeeeeee eee eee es 3 42 Oil PrOSSUIC si eiseccliewhid einean eneen 3 46 Safety Belt Reminders ceeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 33 SOCUILY A E E A ET 3 46 StabiliTrak Indicator ccccceeseseeeeeeeeeeees 3 40 Tire PrOSSUNC fe iscs scat seh se ndeaaaecnquea ze aneian 3 41 Tow Haul Mode ecceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeenees 3 47 Lighting EMU EXIT rriena 3 19 Lights Exterion LAMPS siiin aean 3 15 FIASHAOsP ASS sccc22segacevasaadtaneacecttenscarsmcnn E 3 9 High Low Beam Changer ceeeeeeeee 3 8 On Reminder ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee erase 3 17
434. seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Harness e Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Package e Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal e Brown Taillamps e White Ground e Light Green Back up Lamps e Red Black Battery Feed e Dark Blue Trailer Brake There is a location in the Underhood Fuse Block for these circuits but they are not connected They should be connected and proper fuses installed by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center Your vehicle is equipped with the seven wire trailer towing harness This harness with a seven pin universal trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform If you are charging a remote non vehicle battery press the Tow Haul mode button located at the end of the shift lever This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery 4 66 Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with your vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package These provisions are for an electric brake controller The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for the trailer brake controller The harness contains the following wires e Dark Blue Brake Signal to Trailer Connector e Red Black Battery e Light Blue White Brake Switch e White Ground It should be installed by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center Trailer Recommendations
435. shawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center United States only The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs Specific vehicle information can be found in one place The Online Owner Center allows you to e Get e mail service reminders e Access information about your specific vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner manual e Keep track of your vehicle s service history and maintenance schedule e Find GM dealers retailers for service nationwide e Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members Refer to www MyGMLink com on the web for updated information and to register your vehicle My GM Canada Canada only My GM Canada is a password protected section of gmcanada com where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease 7 4 Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers My Driveway Receive service reminders and helpful advice on owning and maintaining your vehicle My Preferences Manage your profile subscribe to E News and use tools and for
436. should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline A CAUTION Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline be sure you and any passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels will not get good traction You cannot accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you will need longer braking distances It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get stuck Be careful to keep mud from building up and washing onto the engine cooling system When you drive on sand you will sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely
437. side air and prevent odors from entering the vehicle Recirculation may also help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly once the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside temperature 3 25 The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defrost or defogging modes If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes the indicator will flash three times and turn off The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the button again or turning off the engine AUX For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls Press the AUX button to turn the rear climate control system on or off See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 3 29 amp Outside Air If Equipped Press this button to turn on the outside air mode When this mode is selected air from outside the vehicle circulates throughout the vehicle An indicator light on the button comes on to show that it is activated The outside air mode can be used with all modes but it cannot be used with the recirculation mode 3 26 Air Conditioning 3 Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning A C compressor on and off When a
438. siders over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5 56 for additional information GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 67 for information on proper tire rotation A CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on your vehicle s wheels A CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires w
439. sing the previous and next folder buttons the Jd tune knob or the K SEEK D arrows You can also play an MP3 CD R or CD RW that was recorded using no file folders If a CD R or CD RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists and 255 files the player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum but all items over the maximum are not accessible Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as the CD label All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always be accessed before root folders or files If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio CDA and MP3 files a folder under the root directory called CD access all of the CD audio tracks on the disc Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The lt previous and next gt folder functions do not display on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When the CD contains only p
440. single press of the power button but the RSE system will remain under Parental Control To turn Parental Control off press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds The RSE returns from where it was previously left and the padlock icon disappears from the radio display Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or ejecting any disc pressing the play icon on the radio DVD display menu or changing an ignition position 3 105 Headphones The RSE includes two 2 channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system Channel 1 is dedicated to the DVD player while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections These headphones can be used to listen to the radio CDs DVDs MP3s DVDAs any auxiliary source connected to A V jacks or the auxiliary input jack if your vehicle has this feature The wireless headphones have an On Off button channel 1 2 switch and a volume control Push the power button to turn on the headphones An indicator light located on the headphones comes on If the light comes on but there is intermittent sound 3 106 and or static on the headphones or if the indicator light does not come on the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information Switch the headphones to Off when not in use Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console The headphones shut off automatically to
441. spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote k Maintenance Footnotes Lubricate the front suspension steering linkage and parking brake cable guides Control arm ball joints require lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 C or higher or they could be damaged a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Visually check constant velocity joints rubber boots and axle seals for leaks c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at l
442. splays RDM Random With the random setting the tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD or all CDs in a six disc CD player To use random do one of the following e Press the CD AUX button or press and hold the button A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays Insert one or more discs partway into the slot of the CD player To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six disc CD player in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio with CD and DVD press the DVD CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD or insert a disc partway into the slot A RDM label displays To play tracks from a single CD in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains inside the radio for future listening For the radio with CD and DVD press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing entertainment 3 85 CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing the disc and or track number displays when a CD
443. stance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program EIMOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program For vehicles purchased in the U S call 1 866 HUMMER6 486 6376 Text Telephone TTY 1 888 889 2438 For vehicles purchased in Canada call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year As the owner of a new HUMMER vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the HUMMER Roadside Assistance program Who is
444. stic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so that the speaker will not be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12
445. surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start the engine and begin to drive away ABS will check itself You might hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with the ABS this warning light will stay on See Antilock Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens w
446. t or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Also see Tires on page 5 55 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where the tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between the tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You have a lot less traction or grip and need to be very careful 4 36 What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it can offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution The Traction Control System TCS improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road TCS improves your ability to accelerate See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 39 Even though you have TCS slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions Under certain conditions you might want to turn the TCS off such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 5 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 7 The Antilock
447. t an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada and extended powertrain warranty in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your i
448. t lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P 2 42 Shifting Out of PARK P This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to e Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in PARK P with the shift lever button fully released and e Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK P unless the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 5 40 for more information To shift out of PARK P use the following 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Then press the shift lever button 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still are unable to shift out of PARK P Engine Exhaust Fully release the shift lever button 1 2 While holding down the brake pedal press the shift lever button again A CAUTION 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO w
449. t number shown on the original battery s label See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for battery location Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 40 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage If you drive your vehicle infrequently remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep the battery from running down Extended Storage For extended storage of your vehicle remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger This will help maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time 5 39 Jump Starting If your vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely A CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you 5 40
450. t sensor located on the top of the instrument panel Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay If the vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once the vehicle leaves the garage it takes approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 3 18 Instrument Panel Brightness C Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights and is located next to the exterior lamp control Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights Turning the knob to the f
451. t your engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the 2 Let up on the brake pedal trailer can be damaged 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here is chocks how to do it 1 ee Maintenance When Trailer Towing Apply your regular brakes but do not shift into PARK P yet Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more eG Somegne place Chocks Ungertkie Weller on this Things that are especially important in trailer wheels ase i operation are automatic transmission fluid do not When the wheel chocks are in place release the overfill engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load and brake system Each of these is covered in this Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your manual and the Index will help you find them quickly parking brake and shift into PARK P If you are trailering it is a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Release the regular brakes y y P Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight 4 65 Trailer Wiring Harness The
452. ter restriction indicator it lets you know when the engine air cleaner filter needs to be replaced On vehicles with a restriction indicator you should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at every oil change and replace the engine air cleaner filter when the indicator tells you to On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator you should inspect the air cleaner filter at every oil change and replace it at the first oil change after 100 000 miles 160 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction Indicator Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air duct When the indicator turns black or is in the red orange change zone replace the filter and reset the indicator See Inspecting the Engine Air Cleaner Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction Indicator later in this section for further instructions Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction Indicator To inspect the air cleaner filter remove it from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the engine air cleaner filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required See Inspecting the Engine Air Cleaner Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction Indicator later in this section for further instructions Inspecting the Engine Air Cleaner Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Res
453. the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control e Step lightly on the brake pedal e Press the button on the steering wheel e Press the button on the steering wheel Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel It controls the following systems Headlamps Taillamps Parking Lamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights 3 15 The exterior lamps control has four positions D Off Turn the control to this position to turn off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps DRL Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position will only work for vehicles that are shifted into the PARK P position AUTO Automatic Turn the control to this position to automatically turn on the headlamps at normal brightness together with the following e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps 00 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following Instrument Pane
454. the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 5 63 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
455. the trailer hitch and objects behind you causing vehicle or property damage Do not use this system to judge the distance between the spare tire and objects behind you When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly The rear vision camera system may not work properly or display a clear image in the following situations e In the dark e When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens e fice snow mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens Clean the lens rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft cloth e Ifthe back of the vehicle is in an accident the position and mounting angle of the camera may change or the camera may be affected Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer e Extreme high or low temperatures or extreme temperature changes can affect the image displayed OnStar System ile Jl es OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If your airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If you lock your keys in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock your doors If you need roadside assistance press the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside Service for you
456. ther trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information 4 NOTES 7 18 A Accessories and Modifications eeeeeees 5 3 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle ceeeeeeeeee es 1 75 Additives FUG wtissiccaiedevniavs citar tan ane 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment eeeeee 5 110 Air Cleaner Filter Engine ceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 5 18 Air Conditioning ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 22 Airbag Off LHE vceeccectetoies ssccie anera hits 3 35 Readiness Light 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 3 34 Airbag System cccccceceeceeceeceeceeseeeeeeeeeaesees 1 64 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 70 When Should an Airbag Inflate 8 1 69 Where Are the Airbags cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 66 Airbag Systems Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle o ae 1 75 Airbag Off Switc
457. this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 for more information 3 93 Using an MP3 Radio with Six Disc Player MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates 32 kbps 40 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 80 kbps 96 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 160 kbps 192 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate Song title artist name and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 files By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in the order in which they were recorded to the disc
458. tings OFF default No automatic seat exit recall will occur ON The driver s seat will move back when the key is removed from the ignition The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the ignition If the automatic movement has already occurred and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again the seat will stay in the original exit position unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 69 MEMORY SEAT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1 4 for more information Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No remote memory seat recall will occur ON The driver s seat and on some vehicles the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays Using DIC Buttons on pa
459. tion Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight Use the following chart to determine how much your vehicle can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Enie sid Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 6 2L V8 SUV 6 2L V8 SUT 8 200 Ibs 3 720 kg 8 200 Ibs 3 720 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 804 kg Sport utility truck SUT models are neither designed nor intended to tow 5th wheel or gooseneck trailers The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded Ask your dealer retailer for our trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 5 for more information 4 58 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If you have a lot of options equipment passeng
460. tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 64 for additional information Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to
461. tisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 If your vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5 72 for additional important information 1 75 Q Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system A If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired 1 76 Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 33 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 5 103 Airbags The airbag syst
462. to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject J Tune Turn this knob to select MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing Ki SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 WMA file if more than five seconds have played If less than five seconds have played the previous MP3 WMA file plays Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 WMaA file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the MP3 WMA files on the CD lt Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder lt 44 REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays 3 101 RDM Random With the random setting MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To
463. to the right of the steering wheel You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 for more information Full Time Four Wheel Drive The transfer case on your Full Time Four Wheel Drive vehicle is designed to constantly send the engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction To get the most out of Full Time Four Wheel Drive you must be familiar with its operation Notice Driving on pavement in Four Wheel High Lock or Four Wheel Low Lock for extended periods may cause premature wear on your vehicle s powertrain and tires Do not drive in Four Wheel High Lock or Four Wheel Low Lock on pavement for extended periods 2 36 Transfer Case Dial The transfer case dial is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster Use this switch to shift into and out of the different Full Time Four Wheel Drive modes The transfer case is a part of the Full Time Four Wheel Drive system and allows the following four different modes of operation 4 Full Time Four Wheel Drive This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations It can be used for light or variable off road conditions 4t Four Wheel High Lock Use this mode when you need extra traction in most off road situations such as sand mud snow or level rocky trails 4 Four Wheel Low Lock This mode delivers extra torque to all four whe
464. ton within three seconds after entering a numeric selection to clear all numerical inputs 40 Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine Press this button before entering the number Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries do the following 1 Slide the rear cover back on the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery cover If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the battery and keep it in a cool dry place 3 112 Recommended Action The picture does not fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls The remote control does not work After stopping the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning The ignition might not be turned ON RUN or in ACC ACCESSORY Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by pressing the display menu button on the remote control Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorr
465. trical component To remove fuses if you don t have a fuse extractor hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on its location 5 113 FAN HI FAN LO 50 C59 z FAN CNTRL C44 C19 C24 C25 C26 C27 J REAR DEFOG 5 114 C2J C39 C6 C119 C129 C169 C179 C20 AC CMPRSR sTRTR PWR Co TRI UJ 57 C72 g C21 C22 23 PRK LAMP m 1TP C30 34 m TP C37 C41 C45 C46 run 6473 CRNK 5 HDLP LO C103 C15 C28 C31 C35 C39 C43 C44 C32 C33 C36 C40 N 62 C19 C49 C8 C13 C18 Left Trailer Stop Turn Lamp Engine Controls Engine Control Module Throttle Control Right Trailer Stop Turn Lamp 5 Front Washer ann cle prake System 2 Fuses Ueo 29 Key Ignition System Theft Deterrent System Miscellaneous Ignition Cruise Control Rear Vision Camera Airbag System Battery 5 115 Fuses Uae o a instrument Panel Custer 20 Run Accessoy a Aoier Climate Control anition a2 Rear Detooor as SEO B1 Upfiter Usage Batey a Cigarette Lighter Auxiliary Power Outlet 45 Special Equipment Option SEO P46 Climate Controls ignition 47 Engine Control Module ignition 50 cooing Fan UCase a pear one semee J Case 5 Vehicle Stability System Antilock Brake Siete 1
466. triction Indicator 1 Loosen the screws on the engine air cleaner filter cover 7 Reset the air filter restriction indicator if equipped by pressing the top button on the indicator If your vehicle is not equipped with the air filter restriction indicator refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the engine air cleaner filter See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 A CAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is Pull the air cl fi i hea not there and the engine backfires you could 3 Pull the air cleaner filter up and out from the air be burned Do not drive with it off and be 2 Lift the cover upward and set it aside cleaner housing Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible 4 Clean the air cleaner filter sealing surfaces and the housing 5 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire f f can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can 6 Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving 5 20 Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission
467. tting the Clock MP3 Radio with a Single CD and DVD Player If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD and DVD player it has a button for setting the time and date To set the time and date follow the instructions ale Press the button and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one e Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right gt I SEEK arrow or the gt gt FWD forward button To decrease press the left Ki SEEK arrow or the lt lt REV reverse button You can also turn the Jd knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month day year to day month year To change the time or date default settings follow these instructions 1 Press the button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month are displayed 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the button again to apply the selected defau
468. tton and lift up Luggage Carrier If your vehicle has this feature you can load cargo on your vehicle The luggage carrier consists of siderails attached to the roof The crossrails attach into the siderails and can be moved back and forth to accommodate securing various cargo sizes See your dealer retailer for more information Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 300 Ibs 136 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo only on top of the crossrails and tie the cargo down to the crossrail support cargo tie down loops making sure to fasten it securely Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 44 Rear Seat Armrest Your vehicle has a rear seat armrest with cupholders To access pull the tab on the armrest forward Cargo Tie Downs SUT There are four oval shaped openings A in the cargo bed that allow access to four tie downs You can use these tie downs to secure cargo 2 65 All Weather Cargo Area SUT Your vehicle has features to help it resist the elements and protect cargo inside the cargo area Even when the water management system is working properly and the cover system is on there may be some instances heavy rains automated car washes etc when water may be present in the drain holes See Cargo Ar
469. tton that controls this feature is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel To use this feature ensure that the following conditions are met The engine must be running All doors must be fully closed The suspension will not raise or lower if a door is open e The vehicle speed must be less than 40 mph 64 km h The system will not activate otherwise Press the height control button to raise the rear of the vehicle A light in the button will begin to flash as the rear of the vehicle rises Once the extended height has been reached this may take up to a minute the warning light will stop flashing and will stay lit while the vehicle is at the extended height To lower the vehicle to the normal ride height press the button again The light in the button will flash as the suspension lowers When the light in the button stops flashing and goes out the suspension has reached the normal ride height This feature will lower the vehicle to the normal height if vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph 64 km h You may also want to use this feature when ascending descending or cresting a steep hill as this can help prevent the rear bumper from dragging on the base of the hill or prevent the vehicle from grounding out high centering on the crest of the hill Do not use this feature when towing a trailer 4 53 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System The electronically controlled a
470. ture See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 40 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor turns back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 27 for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 40 See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 28 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on page 5 27 for further information 3 57 This message also displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but ther
471. ture To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Notice Do not try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts Your vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage 2 30 To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wa
472. turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path such as boulders trees logs or ruts What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to find out Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion 4 23 Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use transmission and transfer case low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Do not use more power than you need because you do not want the wheels to start spinning or sliding Let the traction system work to control any wheel slippage The traction control system allows for moderate wheel spin with some capability to dig in and power up the hill Do not continue if the vehicle shudders or exhibits suspension hopping This can cause damage to the driveline or suspension components Improper driving technique is not covered by your vehicle warranty 4 24 A CAUTION Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up Try to drive straight up th
473. two seconds This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio While listening to a disc press the K seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter if more than ten seconds have played Press the right gt I seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a DVD video menu is being displayed press either the left K1 or right D I seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu Hold either the left or right I seek arrow to perform a cursor left or right on the menu 3 115 PROG Program Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer press this button to select the next disc if multiple discs are loaded This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press the PROG button to perform the menu function Enter Theft Deterrent Feature THEFT
474. u do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM This message displays if a problem occurs with the suspension system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving there is a problem with the air suspension system See your dealer retailer for service SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer retailer before turning off the engine See PASS Key Ill Operation on page 2 26 for more information SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 41 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 64 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL This message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System TCS When this message displays the system will not limit wheel spi
475. udio source is defined as DVD slot CD slot XM FM AM Front Auxiliary Jack or Rear Auxiliary Jack Press the D button to turn the radio on The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers Front seat passengers can listen to the radio AM FM or XM by pressing the BAND button or the DVD CD AUX button to select CD slot DVD slot front or rear auxiliary input if available If a playback device is plugged into the radio s front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack the front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 105 for more information In some vehicles depending on audio options the rear speakers can be muted when the RSA power is turned on See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 114 for more information Playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc Your radio with a Six Disc CD player has the capability of playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index Playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc Your radio with a CD and DVD player has the capability of playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index CD Messages CHECK DIS
476. uipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a crash if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 34 1 77 4 NOTES 1 78 Section 2 Features and Controls KYS vers deatdeiatacyatesancndenca teeta taunnien tapnnedeeeacagaheents 2 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System OD SFATION s cccadenicnentadamioncamancrmenec dies nE G N 2 5 Remote Vehicle Start c ccceeseseeeeeneeeeenes 2 8 Doors and LOCKS a a 2 10 Door LOCKS sce aciisitnertsdoedanilis sabia eiesecey 2 10 Power Door LOCKS 2 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 Delayed LOCKING 0 cccccieceecendsedteeeti eine onest 2 11 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeeneee ees 2 12 Lockout Protection 2 cc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Liftgate SUV iei etniese aaia 2 13 Midgate SUT e sieniin oe 2 14 Tailgate Spare Tire Carrier cceeeeeeeneee ees 2 16 WINDOWS viscose tveenteess nce deinteranearttestansenemediendeate 2 19 Power WINGOWS lt 5 f0sc22is sees moe deion Err 2 20 SUN VISOMSies sede cstcccsadace ae E EE sexesars 2 23
477. ulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working 4 64 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you do not shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions You may also want to activate the tow haul mode if the transmission shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode earlier When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating on page 5 27 Parking on Hills When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down A CAUTION eo e star
478. uld damage your vehicle s drivetrain The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always lock the rear axle before attempting situations and or navigating terrain which could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck The locking rear axle will be disengaged when the vehicle s speed is greater than 40 mph 64 km h if the vehicle s battery is low and or the transfer case is shifted out of Four Wheel Low Lock mode Notice lf you lock the rear axle while driving on pavement you could damage your vehicle s drivetrain The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use the locking rear axle on pavement StabiliTrak System Your vehicle has the StabiliTrak system which combines Antilock brake traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure there are no problems You may hear or feel the system working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph 32 km h In some cases it may take approximately two miles of driving before the system initializes If the system fails to turn on or activate the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC TRACTIO
479. us folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays D gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD R CD RW or all discs in a six disc CD player To use random do one of the following 1 To play MP3 files from the CD R or CD RW in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 2 To play songs from all CDs loaded in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by a
480. us to get out of your vehicle if the comes on when the ignition key is turned to the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the ON RUN position parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll There are several different positions for the shift lever Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured P R N D M 2 1 To be sure your vehicle will not move even lt when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK P on page 2 41 lf you are pulling a trailer see PARK P This position locks the rear wheels It is the Towing a Trailer on page 4 55 best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle cannot move easily REVERSE R Use this gear to back up When parked on a hill especially when the vehicle R 9 4 has a heavy load you may notice an increase in the Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle effort to shift out of PARK P See Torque Lock is moving forward could damage the transmission Automatic Transmission under Shifting Into PARK P The repairs would not be covered by your warranty on page 2 41 for more information Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped 2 32 To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the trans
481. use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel The RKE transmitter with the remote start button provides an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running As a result you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 for additional information Q Remote Start Press and release the lock button and then press and hold the remote start button to start the vehicle To start the vehicle using the remote start feature 1 Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button then immediately press and hold the transmitter s remote start button until the turn signal lights flash If you cannot see the vehicle s lights press and hold the remote start button for at least four seconds The vehicle s doors will lock Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn off the ignition When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running 3 If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat these steps while the engine is still running to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes Remote start can be extended one time After entering the v
482. uses If you experience a problem see your dealer retailer for additional information on the accessory power plugs The accessory power outlets are powered even when the ignition is in LOCK OFF Continuing to use power outlets while the ignition is in LOCK OFF may cause the vehicle s battery to run down Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter If your vehicle has an ashtray it is removable and fits into the front cupholder Pull up on the ashtray door to open it Notice If you put papers pins or other flammable items in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the ashtray pull it out from the console To reinstall the ashtray slide it back to the original position To use the cigarette lighter if equipped push it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating Analog
483. ut 3 8 inch 10 mm below the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 5 53 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer Halogen Bulbs A CAUTION Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 5 48 Headlamps To replace a headlamp bulb 1 Open the hood See Hood Release on page 5 10 for more information 2 Locate the affected headlamp on the inner front portion of the hood 3 Turn the bulb socket retainer counterclockwise to unlock the bulb socket You may prefer to unplug the electrical connector before removing the bulb socket If so complete Step 5 before doing this step 4 Pull the bulb socket straight out from the headlamp housing 5 Unplug the electrical Front Turn Signal and Parking connector Lamps To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb 1 Open the hood See Hood Release on page 5 10 for more information 2 Locate the bulb you need to change 3 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp housing 6 Push the new bulb socket into the headlamp ass
484. vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object does not deform e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts Your vehicle has roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 1 64 Roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover Roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts near frontal impacts or rear impacts Both roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over In any particular crash no one can say whether an airb
485. vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 You should change the oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 5 13 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 16 Units Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units All of the vehicle information will then be displayed
486. vents In this mode the system will automatically force outside air into the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode The air conditioning compressor runs automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is close to freezing Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear 3 28 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window Qy Rear Window Defogger Press this button to turn on the rear window defogger It will automatically turn off several minutes after it has been activated The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Outlet Adjustment Your vehicle has air outlets that let you adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle Use the thumbwheels located beside the air outlets to direct the airflow up and down Use the thumbwheels below the air outlets to direct the air left or r
487. ver position e The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in PARK P e The ignition key should come out only in LOCK OFF Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park P Mechanism Check A CAUTION When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and the transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only e To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or spec
488. vide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age
489. ving A CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger i
490. ving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunk Driving on page 4 2 Crossing Obstacles Roll Your Tires Over Large Rocks Approach Angle a Key to Mobility Do not straddle large rocks drive over them letting the tire cover the rock The tread of the tire is thicker and tougher than the sidewall of the tire and is more resilient to impact than underbody components If you encounter a large dip in the terrain do not enter straight on enter at an angle 15 minimum approach A 75 maximum approach angle B For very large dips ditches or small washes coast in using the engine as a brake transmission and transfer case lowest gears Then use the low ranges in the transmission and transfer case to power out 4 21 Log Crossing Using the proper technique your vehicle will cross logs up to 10 inches 25 4 cm in diameter Approach the log at approximately a 15 angle A with the transmission in FIRST 1 and the transfer case in 4LO LOCK and walk your vehicle over one tire at a time It may be necessary to modulate your brake pedal and accelerator to avoid spin out Ease the v
491. w bose com audiopilot 3 77 Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between AM FM or XM if equipped The selection displays J Tune Turn this knob to select radio stations Ki SEEK I Press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or to the next station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band i Information XM Satellite Radio Service MP3 and RDS Features Press this button to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or MP3 song A choice of additional information such as Channel Song Artist and CAT category can display Continue pressing this button to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the information about that label displays When information is not available No Info displays 3 78 Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked Tune to your favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 FAV Favorites A m
492. water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts Your vehicle is capable of depths up to 20 inches 50 cm Know how to judge whether the water is deeper than this before proceeding into it If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4 33 for more information on driving through water 4 31 After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the engine and oil coolers for mud accumulation Thoroughly and carefully clean these devices to allow proper cooling Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use See the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Assist Steps If your vehicle has removable side ste
493. way than they really are Outside Heated Mirrors The vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which help clear them of condensation snow and ice When the rear window defogger button is pressed the heated mirrors are also turned on See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 for more information 2 49 Object Detection Systems Rear Vision Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear vision camera system Read this entire section before using the camera system The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle When the driver shifts the vehicle into REVERSE R the video screen will automatically slide out from the rear view mirror Once the driver shifts out of REVERSE R the video screen will slide back into the rear view mirror after a delay If your vehicle does not have a rearview mirror slide out video screen your vehicle may have a navigation radio system See the Navigation System manual for more information on the rear vision camera display video screen 2 50 Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On or Off To turn off the rear vision camera system do the following 1 Shift into P PARK 2 Turn the ignition key to the RUN position 3 Press the right button on the inside rear view mirror briefly the right green light indicator will turn off The rear camera vision dis
494. wer Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 47 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 57 If you need to install more than one child restraint in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 46 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary 1 58 6 If your child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer
495. windshield washer fluid system This activation will initiate four heated wash wipe cycles The first heated wash wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds to occur depending on outside temperature After the first wash wipe cycle it may take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles The heated windshield washer fluid system may be turned off at any time by pushing the button again prior to the completion of 4 wash wipe cycles When the heated windshield washer fluid system is activated under certain outside temperature conditions steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed This is a normal condition A message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC when the washer fluid is low See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Rear Window Wiper Washer If your vehicle has a rear window washer wiper the button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the instrument panel cluster A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision W Rear Wiper Press this side of the button to turn the rear wiper on and off The wiper speed cannot be changed CI Wash Press this button to spray washer fluid on the rear window Release the button when enough fluid has been sprayed on the window The rear wiper will run a few more cycle
496. y you want removed 4 Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays 5 Repeat the steps to remove more categories Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label You cannot remove or add categories while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h 3 81 Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer retailer for service Locked This message displays when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3 103 later in this section for further detail 3 82 Playing CD s Six Disc CD Player LOAD 7 Press this button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 Press and release the LOAD 7 button Load Disc and then Insert Disc 1 displays 2 Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up Loading Disc 1 displays as the disc is being pul
497. you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You might not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving This off road guide is meant to provide advice for when you drive your vehicle off paved roads Also see Braking on page 4 3 The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself
498. ystem can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system Notice lf you use extra inhibitors and or additives in your vehicle s cooling system you could damage your vehicle Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information 5 25 Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location A CAUTION Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn

2008 Hummer H2 Owners Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents